Mustang | 05+ 2013 | Owner`s manual | Mustang 05+ 2013 Owner`s manual

Mustang 05+ 2013 Owner`s manual
2013 MUSTANG Owner’s Manual
DR3J 19A321 AA
|
September 2012
2013 MUSTANG Owner’s Manual
fordowner.com
ford.ca
|
Third Printing
|
Owner’s Manual
|
Mustang
|
Litho in U.S.A.
Table of Contents
1
Introduction
9
Child Safety
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seat positioning . . . . .
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing child safety seats .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Safety Belts
Fastening the safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime .
Safety belt-minder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
.19
.19
.21
.24
.
.
.
.
33
.35
.38
.39
.41
Personal Safety System
42
Supplementary Restraints System
Driver and passenger airbags . . . .
Front passenger sensing system . .
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crash sensors and airbag indicator
Airbag disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
43
.45
.47
.50
.52
.53
Keys and Remote Control
General information on radio frequencies.
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a lost key or remote control. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
54
.54
.55
.55
.56
.
.
.
.
.
.
57
.57
.58
.59
.60
.60
.62
MyKey
Settings, MyKey . . . . . .
Creating. . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . .
System status. . . . . . . .
Remote start, MyKey . .
Troubleshooting, MyKey
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
Table of Contents
Locks
64
Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Interior luggage compartment release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Security
69
SecuriLock® passive anti-theft system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Anti-theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Steering Wheel
74
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Wipers and Washers
77
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Lighting
Lighting control . . . . . . . . .
Autolamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument lighting dimmer.
Headlamp exit delay . . . . . .
Daytime running lamps . . . .
Front fog lamps . . . . . . . . .
Direction indicators . . . . . .
Interior lamps . . . . . . . . . .
Windows and Mirrors
Power windows . . . .
Exterior mirrors . . . .
Interior mirrors . . . .
Sun visors . . . . . . . .
Sunshade . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
78
.78
.79
.79
.80
.81
.81
.82
.82
.
.
.
.
.
83
.83
.85
.87
.87
.89
Table of Contents
3
Instrument Cluster
90
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Warning lamps and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Audible warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Information Displays
97
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Information messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Audio System
AM/FM stereo with CD/MP3
Auxiliary input jack . . . . . .
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite radio information . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
117
.119
.122
.124
.125
Climate Control
Manual heating and air conditioning. . . .
Navigation system based climate control
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabin air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
128
.128
.130
.133
.134
.
.
.
.
.
.
135
.135
.136
.138
.139
.140
.141
.
.
.
.
Seats
Sitting in the correct position
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . .
Manual seats . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
143
HomeLink® wireless control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Auxiliary Power Points
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
148
4
Table of Contents
Storage Compartments
149
Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Starting and Stopping the Engine
150
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Fuel and Refueling
Fuel quality . . . . . .
Running out of fuel.
Refueling . . . . . . . .
Fuel consumption . .
.
.
.
.
154
.155
.156
.157
.159
.
.
.
.
163
.163
.164
.167
.170
Brakes
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hints on driving with anti-lock brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
.173
.174
.174
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Transmission
Transmission operation .
Automatic transmission .
Manual transmission . . .
Hill start assist . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Traction Control
175
Traction Control™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Stability Control
176
AdvanceTrac® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Parking Aids
179
Sensing system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Rear-view camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
5
Cruise Control
183
Driving Aids
185
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Load Carrying
187
Vehicle loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Towing
194
Trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Recreational towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
200
Driving Hints
205
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Roadside Emergencies
Getting roadside assistance .
Hazard warning flashers . . .
Fuel cut-off switch . . . . . . .
Jump-starting the vehicle . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
209
.209
.210
.210
.211
Customer Assistance
214
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Fuses
222
Changing a fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Fuse specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
6
Table of Contents
Maintenance
General information . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing the hood . . . .
Under hood overview . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant check . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission fluid check
Brake fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering fluid check . . . . . .
Washer fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the wiper blades . . . . . .
Air filter(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the headlamps . . . . . . . .
Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Vehicle Care
Cleaning products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repairing minor paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens
Cleaning leather seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
230
.230
.231
.232
.232
.234
.234
.235
.239
.240
.240
.241
.241
.243
.244
.245
.246
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
252
.252
.252
.254
.254
.254
.255
.255
.256
.257
.257
.258
Table of Contents
7
Wheels and Tires
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a road wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporary mobility kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel lug nut torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
261
.261
.277
.281
.286
.294
.294
Capacities and Specifications
Engine specifications . . . . . . .
Engine drivebelt . . . . . . . . . . .
Part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle identification number .
Vehicle certification label . . . .
Transmission code designation.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
295
.295
.295
.300
.301
.302
.302
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Accessories
303
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Ford Extended Service Plan
305
Scheduled Maintenance
308
Normal scheduled maintenance and log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
SYNC®
325
Pairing your phone for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
911 Assist™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Vehicle Health Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
8
Table of Contents
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Status bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing media features . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jukebox features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording (saving) music to your jukebox
Accessing the music in your jukebox . . . .
Creating a playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where am I?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the help screen . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
362
.368
.368
.370
.375
.392
.393
.393
.394
.397
.400
.401
Appendices
422
Index
440
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to
print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change
specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No
part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our
written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2012
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
9
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you
know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when
using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes a range of product features and options,
sometimes before they are generally available. Therefore, you may find
options in this manual that are not found on your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different
models, so they may appear different than your vehicle. However, the
essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable
laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral
part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or
right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat.
A. Right-hand side
A
B. Left-hand side
B
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
10
Introduction
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and
others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol.
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Symbol Description
Safety alert
Symbol Description
See Owner’s
Manual
Avoid
smoking,
flames, or
sparks
Brake fluid –
non
petroleum
base
Check fuel
cap
Battery
Symbol Description
Anti-lock
braking
system
Battery acid
Brake system
Cabin air
filter
Child seat
lower anchor
C hild seat
tether anchor
Child Safety
Door Lock
and Unlock
Cruise
control
Engine air
filter
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Engine
coolant
temperature
Fan warning
Fasten safety
belt
Front airbag
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Do not open
when hot
Front fog
lamps
Introduction
Symbol Description
Fuel pump
reset
Heated rear
window
Lighting
control
Panic alarm
Power
steering fluid
Service
engine soon
Windshield
defrost and
demist
11
Symbol Description
Symbol Description
Fuse
Hazard
compartment
warning
flasher
Interior
Jack
luggage
compartment
release
Low tire
Maintain
pressure
correct fluid
warning
level
Parking aid
Parking
system
brake system
Power
windows
front and
rear
Side airbag
Power
window
lockout
Stability
control
Windshield
washer and
wiper
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. Additionally, when your vehicle is in for service or repair,
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
12
Introduction
Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC® Vehicle
Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also
be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used for any
purpose. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
• How fast the vehicle was travelling;
• Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel
(if equipped).
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data or information
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see
limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, Directions and
Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
13
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have such special equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company
and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court
order or where required by law enforcement, other government
authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC® or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If
you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the
911 Assist feature. See your SYNC® chapter for more
information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do
not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not
activate the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses
to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle
travel information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC®
supplement for more information.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
14
Introduction
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING: Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle
components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Note: Certain components in your vehicle, such as airbag modules,
safety belt pretensioners, and remote control batteries, may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
more information.
FORD CREDIT (U.S. ONLY)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you
acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through
Ford Credit, thank you for your business.
For your convenience, we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well
as help manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as access to
Account Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts.
We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft
parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair.
You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for
the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides
years of service is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed
in this owner’s manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or
exceed these specifications.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
15
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent
requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and
dent resistance. During vehicle development, we validate that these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine
Ford replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only
replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to
your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, see the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the warranty
information that is provided to you along with your owner’s manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
16
Introduction
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you
must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and
security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations.
Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this owner’s manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
owner’s manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. See this owner’s manual for all other required
information and warnings.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Child Safety
17
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a
device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child
safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician and consulting your pediatrician to make sure your child
seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and properly
installed in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST,
contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or locate NHTSA on the
internet. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office
for referral to a CPST or for further information, contact your provincial
ministry of transportation, or locate your local St. John Ambulance
office by searching for St. John Ambulance on the internet, or
Transport Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to
properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their
height, age, and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury
or death to your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
Recommended
age
restraint type
Infants
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or Use a child safety seat
or
less (generally age four or
(sometimes called an
toddlers younger).
infant carrier,
convertible seat, or
toddler seat).
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
18
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
Recommended
age
restraint type
Small
Children who have outgrown or no Use a belt-positioning
children longer properly fit in a child safety booster seat.
seat (generally children who are
less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Larger
Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle safety
belt having the lap belt
children longer properly fit in a
snug and low across the
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at
hips, shoulder belt
centered across the
least 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or
shoulder and chest, and
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by seat back upright.
child restraint manufacturer).
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local and
state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. See Front
Passenger Sensing System in the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter for more information.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Child Safety
19
CHILD SEATS
Use a child safety seat (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat) for infants,
toddlers or children weighing
40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move your
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings
provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if
the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size, height, weight, or
age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child’s height,
age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a crash.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
20
Child Safety
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by X
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety
Safety
(lower (lower
belt
belt and belt
Restraint Child anchors anchors and
LATCH only
Type
Weight and top only)
top
(lower
tether
tether anchors
anchor)
anchor and top
tether
anchor)
Up to
Rearfacing
48 lb
X
X
child seat (21 kg)
Forward- Up to
facing
48 lb
X
X
X
child seat (21 kg)
Forward- Over
facing
48 lb
X
X
child seat (21 kg)
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against your vehicle seat. See the
Seats chapter for information on head restraints.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Child Safety
21
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight (8), a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or
80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when the child is seated without a booster seat.
• Can the child sit all the way
back against your vehicle seat
back with knees bent
comfortably at the edge of the
seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and
shoulder belt.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
22
Child Safety
Types of Booster Seats
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a
backless booster seat may place your child’s head (as measured at the
tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back
booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that
adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be
a better choice.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Child Safety
23
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings
compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to
the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The
drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the
child’s hips.
If the booster seat slides on your vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
24
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Children 12 and under should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder
belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place your vehicle seat back in the upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5. This
vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Child Safety
25
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward-facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear-facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
26
Child Safety
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger
and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode. You should not be able to pull more belt
out. If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, for example, by pressing
down or kneeling on the child
restraint while pulling up on the
shoulder belt in order to force slack
from the belt.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Child Safety
27
This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the
extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to
achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). See Using
Tether Straps later in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side
to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5
centimeters) of movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury
or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
28
Child Safety
WARNING: The center of the rear seat is NOT designed as a
seating position and is not equipped with safety belts. The
LATCH anchors were not designed to be used with a child seat in the
center position and there is no tether anchor available at the center.
Attempted use of the center as a seating position will increase the risk
of injury or death in the event of a crash.
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two
lower anchors located where your vehicle seat back and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped
seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat, however
the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For forward-facing
child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top
tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower
anchors for child seat installation at
the seating positions marked with
the child seat symbol.
The LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seat back
below the symbols as shown. Follow
the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
See Using Tether Straps later in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Child Safety
29
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching
Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about
ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• Vehicles with rear seats
• Vehicles without rear seats
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
30
Child Safety
Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether
anchor:
For coupe:
1. Route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat
may not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Child Safety
31
For convertible:
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the top of the head restraint.
The tether anchors are located
rearward of the seat back in the
convertible top sling.
Note: For easier access, attach the
tether with the convertible top up.
Note: The attachments for the
convertible boot located on the back
of the head restraints are not tether
anchors.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
32
Child Safety
2. Access tether anchors located
behind the seat back under the
vinyl tag marked with the child
tether anchor symbol.
3. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat
may not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Safety Belts
33
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seat back upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
34
Safety Belts
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
WARNING: The center of the rear seat is not designed as a
seating position and is not equipped with safety belts. The
LATCH anchors were not designed to be used with a child seat in the
center position and there is no tether anchor available at the center.
Attempted use of the center as a seating position will increase the risk
of injury or death in the event of a crash.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts,
even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• lap and shoulder safety belts.
• shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode, (except driver
safety belt).
• retractor pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions.
• belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position.
• Safety belt warning light and chime. See Safety Belt
Warning Light and Indicator Chime later in this chapter.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in the
Supplemental Restraint System chapter.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes. The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against
the occupant’s body when activated. This helps increase the effectiveness
of the safety belts. In frontal crashes, the safety belt pretensioners can
be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with
the front airbags.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Safety Belts
35
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in your vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
The presenter arm (available on the coupe only) is intended to improve
access to the safety belt and to allow access to the rear seat.
Rotate the presenter arm toward
the front of the vehicle until it locks
into place. This allows easier access
to the front safety belt for the front
seat occupant.
To access the second row seats,
rotate the arm back to its original
position against the trim panel.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
36
Safety Belts
Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seat back upright
and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
Pregnant women should always
wear their safety belts. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of
the shoulder and the center of the
chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNING: After any vehicle crash, the safety belt system at all
passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking
retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Safety Belts
37
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode, and the
front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster,
is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years
old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See the Child Safety chapter.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the safety belt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
38
Safety Belts
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, you can obtain a
safety belt extension assembly from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the
driver’s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle’s
ignition is turned on.
Conditions of Operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Safety Belts
39
SAFETY BELT-MINDER®
This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing
additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating
the safety belt warning light when the driver’s or front passenger’s seat is
occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in
need of a warning. To avoid activating the Belt-Minder® feature for objects
placed in the front passenger seat, warnings will only be given to front seat
occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder® warnings have expired (warnings for approximately
five minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger), the other
occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder® feature.
If...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for approximately
one minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
Then...
The Belt-Minder® feature will not
activate.
The Belt-Minder® feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
The Belt-Minder® feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
40
Safety Belts
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder® Feature
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder®, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave
the Belt-Minder® system activated for yourself and others who may use
the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate or activate
the Belt-Minder® feature while driving the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder® are deactivated and
activated independently. When deactivating or activating one seating
position, do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the
process.
Note: If you are using MyKey®, the Belt-Minder® cannot be disabled.
Also, if the Belt-Minder® has been previously disabled, it will be
re-enabled during the use of MyKey®. See the MyKey® chapter.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation
or activation programming procedure.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder® features can be deactivated
or activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• the parking brake is set
• the transmission selector lever is in position P (automatic
transmission) or N (manual transmission)
• the ignition is on
• the driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled.
1. Turn the ignition on. DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (approximately one
minute).
• Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Safety Belts
41
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled
state. Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
• After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder® feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder® feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced.
However, if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the
belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, see Cleaning the Interior in the
Vehicle Care chapter.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
42
Personal Safety System
PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM™
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the restraints control module. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the safety belt pretensioners
and/or either one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental
restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
43
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk
of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
the back seat and always properly use appropriate child
restraints.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
crash.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
44
Supplementary Restraints System
The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to
work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front
passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery
residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell
the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that
result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small
amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin
and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed
to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also
cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk
of death or serious injuries, such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM™
The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn
(intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
equipped on your vehicle, such as front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy®.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• the hazard control button is pressed
• the panic button (if equipped) is pressed on the remote entry
transmitter, or
• your vehicle runs out of power.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
45
DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag
module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
The driver and front passenger
airbags will deploy during significant
frontal and near-frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of the following:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
46
Supplementary Restraints System
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25
centimeters) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a crash.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
47
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12
and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket or hang objects off
seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console.
Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for
proper airbag status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the passenger
seat sensing system.
WARNING: Any alteration or modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger’s
seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant
and determine if the front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
48
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system
uses a passenger airbag off or pass
airbag off indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator
lamp is located on the front edge of the map lamps.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear-facing infant seat, a
forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this
technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain
children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger front
airbag and seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay
lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn your vehicle off, remove the child restraint from your
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp is lit, it is possible
that the person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn your vehicle off and ask the person to place the seat back in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
49
• Restart your vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Empty seat
Small child
Adult
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Lit
Unlit
Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front passenger
seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the passenger airbag
is disabled, the pass airbag off lamp may or may not be illuminated.
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• objects lodged underneath the seat
• objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if equipped)
• objects hanging off the seat back
• objects stowed in the seat back map pocket (if equipped)
• objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• cargo interference with the seat
• other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
50
Supplementary Restraints System
To know if the front passenger sensing system is operating
properly, see Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this
chapter.
If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:
The driver or adult passengers should check for any objects that may be
lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the
seat.
If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take the
following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull your vehicle over.
• Turn your vehicle off.
• Driver or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart your vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is
no longer illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this owner’s manual.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the airbag cover, on the side of the seat backs (of the front
seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
51
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seat back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again. The side airbag system (including the seat) must
be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seat backs of
the front seats. In certain lateral crashes, the airbag on the side affected
by the crash will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact crashes.
The system consists of the
following:
• a tag on the seat back indicating
that side airbags are found on
your vehicle
• side airbags located inside the
seat back of the driver and front
passenger seats.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system.
Note: The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger
seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty, unbuckled passenger seat.
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
52
Supplementary Restraints System
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
your vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of your
vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which
provide information to the restraints control module which deploys
(activates) the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag and seat mounted side airbags. Based on the type of accident
(frontal impact, side impact or rollover) the restraints control module
will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above
safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the
safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. See the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint
system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal or
lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for
both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (such as crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these safety devices.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
53
• Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts) unless the crash
causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes.
• Side airbags are designed to inflate in side impact crashes, not
rollovers, rear impacts, frontal or near-frontal crashes, unless the crash
causes sufficient lateral deceleration.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
54
Keys and Remote Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The remote control allows you to:
•
•
•
•
remotely lock or unlock the vehicle doors
remotely open the trunk
arm and disarm the anti-theft system (if equipped)
activate the panic alarm
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater
range. A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around your vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by
other short distance radio transmissions (e.g. amateur radios, medical
equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems). If
the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote
control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press
any button unintentionally.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Keys and Remote Control
55
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
The key blade is used to start the
vehicle and unlock or lock the
driver’s door from outside the
vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
Note: If the vehicle is not equipped with active anti-theft system, locking
the driver door with the key does not lock the passenger door. Use the
power door lock, remote control or manually lock the passenger door to
ensure the vehicle is properly secured.
Note: Your vehicle’s keys were
issued with a security label that
provides important vehicle key cut
information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Car Finder
Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn will
chirp and the turn signals will flash. It is recommended that
this method be used to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again
or turn the ignition on to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
56
Keys and Remote Control
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the
back surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from the
vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032
or equivalent.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot near the key
1 ring to remove the battery cover (1).
2. Carefully peel up the rubber gasket (2)
2 from the transmitter if it does not come off
with the battery cover.
3 3. Remove the old battery (3).
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the integrated
keyhead transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the
battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery
housing cavity.
5. Reinstall the rubber gasket.
6. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement or additional keys or remote controls can be purchased
from your authorized dealer. Your dealer can program the transmitters to
your vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself. See the
Security chapter for information on programming your transmitters.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
MyKey
57
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
MyKey® allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes. Any keys that have
not been programmed are referred to as an administrator key or admin
key which can be used to:
• create a restricted key
• program optional MyKey settings
• clear all MyKey features altogether.
Once a key has been programmed, you can access the following
information using the information display control:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle.
• The total distance the vehicle has been driven with a MyKey.
For vehicles equipped with intelligent access (push button start), when
both a MyKey and an admin intelligent access key (fob) are present, the
admin fob will be recognized by the vehicle to start the engine.
Standard Settings
These settings cannot be changed.
• Belt-Minder. This cannot be disabled and the five–minute timer does
not expire. The audio system is muted when MyKey Belt-Minder is
activated.
• Early low fuel. Warnings are displayed in the information display
control followed by an audible tone when the estimated remaining fuel
in the tank will allow 75 miles (121 kilometers) of travel or less.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your vehicle, are forced on:
parking aid, blind spot information system (BLIS) with cross traffic
alert and the collision warning system.
Optional Settings
These settings can be configured right after a MyKey is first created or
changed afterward with an admin key.
• Vehicle speed limit of 80 mph (130 km/h). Visual warnings are
displayed followed by an audible tone when vehicle speed has reached
80 mph (130 km/h).
• Vehicle speed warning of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h).
Visual warnings are displayed followed by an audible tone when the
preselected vehicle speed is exceeded.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
58
MyKey
• Audio system maximum volume of 45%. A message in the audio
system is displayed when attempting to exceed the limited volume.
• AdvanceTrac. The system cannot be turned off when Always-on has
been set.
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display controls to create a MyKey.
For Type 1 information display controls:
1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition or, if the vehicle
is equipped with push button start, put the Intelligent Access key in
the backup slot; see the Starting and Stopping the Engine chapter
for the backup slot location.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Press SETUP using the information display buttons until PRESS
RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed.
4. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
MYKEY will be displayed.
5. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS
AS RESTRICTED is displayed Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT
NEXT START is displayed.
The key is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys.
For Type 2 information display controls:
1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition or, if the vehicle
is equipped with push button start, put the Intelligent Access key in
the backup slot; see the Starting and Stopping the Engine chapter
for the backup slot location.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. At the main menu screen select SETTING then MYKEY by pressing
OK or the right arrow key.
4. Press OK to select CREATE MYKEY.
5. Hold OK as prompted until you see MARK THIS KEY AS
RESTRICTED.
The key is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys.
To program optional settings for the key(s), see the
Programming/Changing Optional Settings chapter.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
MyKey
59
Programming/Changing Optional Settings
Note: All programmed keys can be cleared within the same key cycle in
which a key was programmed, otherwise an admin key is required to
clear the keys. To clear all keys, see Clearing all MyKeys.
You can access the optional settings through the information display
controls.
For Type 1 information display settings
1. Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETTINGS is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey setup menus.
3. Press the SETUP button to display the next menu to scroll through
your choices.
4. On any of the menus, press RESET to highlight your choice with the
<…>.
5. Press SETUP to enter your choice. The next optional setting will be
displayed.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional settings.
For Type 2 information display settings
1. Turn the ignition on using an admin key.
2. Access the main menu and select Settings, then MyKey.
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to an optional feature.
4. Press OK or > to scroll through settings.
5. Press OK or > to make a selection.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
Note: All programmed MyKeys can be cleared within the same key cycle
in which a MyKey was created, otherwise an admin key is required to
clear the keys.
To clear all MyKeys (which removes all restrictions and returns them to
admin key status), use the information display controls to do the following:
For Type 1 information display settings
1. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
CLEAR is displayed.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL
MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed.
For Type 2 information display settings
1. Access the main menu and select Settings, then MyKey.
2. Scroll to Clear All and press the OK button.
3. Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
60
MyKey
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS
The information display controls provide information about keys
programmed to the vehicle:
• MYKEY MILES: Tracks mileage when a MyKey is used. If mileage
does not accumulate as expected, then the MyKey is not being used
by the intended user. The only way to reset this to zero is by clearing
MyKeys. If the mileage is lower than the last time you checked, then
the key system has been recently reset.
• # MYKEY(S): Indicates how many MyKeys are programmed to the
vehicle. Can also be used to detect deletion of a MyKey.
• # ADMIN KEY(S): Indicates how many admin keys are programmed
to the vehicle. Can also be used to detect if an additional key has
been programmed to the vehicle.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS
MyKey is NOT compatible with non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, please see
your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.
The following information MAY help customers who choose to use a
non-Ford-approved remote start system. The actions provided below do
NOT make MyKey compatible with non-Ford-approved remote start
system, but it MAY help you to retain some MyKey functions.
Vehicles Equipped with Traditional Keys
When using a non-Ford-approved remote start system, the default
settings may recognize the remote start system as an additional admin
key with its associated privileges. It is NOT compatible with MyKey.
Restart the engine when you insert a key into the ignition cylinder; it
may help you to retain some MyKey functions.
In addition to the key that has been programmed as a MyKey, owners of
vehicles equipped with traditional keys have the option to program the
non-Ford-approved remote start system as a MyKey if the remote start
fob is used by the MyKey driver.
To program a non-Ford-approved remote start system as a MyKey, do the
following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using a non-Ford approved remote start fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-5 in the Creating a MyKey section.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
MyKey
61
Vehicles Equipped with Intelligent Access Key (Push Button Start)
Note: It is not possible to program the remote start system as a MyKey
on vehicles equipped with intelligent access key (push button start).
Therefore, you should treat the remote start fob as you would any other
admin key. When the vehicle is started using remote start, the system
will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift the vehicle
into gear. Prior to the engine stall, the vehicle will have administrative
privileges. When you restart the engine, the vehicle will identify the user
as an admin or MyKey driver depending on the settings of the actual key
used to start the vehicle.
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey system
status menu, may include the non-Ford-approved remote start system as
an additional key in the total count. See the Checking System Status
section.
For all vehicles with a non-Ford-approved remote start installed, it is
possible to program all real keys as MyKeys, in which case, you will need
to use your remote start system to clear all MyKeys (which removes all
restrictions and returns them to admin key status) by doing the
following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using your non-Ford-approved remote start
fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-3 in the Clearing all MyKeys section.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
62
MyKey
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition
I cannot program a
key.
I cannot program the
optional settings.
I cannot clear the
restricted keys.
I lost the only admin
key.
I lost a key.
Potential Causes
• The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• The key in the ignition is the only admin key
(there always has to be at least one admin
key).
• The intelligent access key is not in the
backup slot (vehicles with push button start).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See the Using MyKey with
Remote Start Systems chapter.
• The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• No keys are programmed to the vehicle. See
the Creating a MyKey chapter.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See the Using MyKey with
Remote Start System chapter.
• Key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• No restricted keys are programmed to the
vehicle. See the Creating a MyKey chapter.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See the Using MyKey with
Remote Start System chapter.
• Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.
• Program spare keys as outlined under
SecuriLock in the Security chapter.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
MyKey
Condition
I accidentally
programmed all keys
as restricted keys.
No restricted key
functions with
intelligent access key
(push button start).
Restricted key
programmed total
includes one additional
key.
63
Potential Causes
• The vehicle has a remote start system that
is recognized as an admin key. See the Using
MyKey with Remote Start System chapter to
reset all restricted keys using remote start.
• An admin key is present at engine start-up.
• No restricted keys are programmed to the
vehicle. See the Creating a MyKey chapter.
• An unknown key has been programmed to
the vehicle as a restricted key.
• The vehicle is equipped with a remote start
system. See the Using MyKey with Remote
Start Systems chapter.
Admin keys
• An unknown key has been programmed to
the vehicle as an admin key.
programmed total
includes one additional • Vehicle is equipped with a remote start
key.
system. See the Using MyKey with remote
start systems chapter.
MyKey miles do not
• The restricted key is not being used by the
accumulate.
intended user.
• The key system has been reset.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
64
Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock
and unlock the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is located on the driver and front passenger
door panels.
A. Unlock
B. Lock
A
B
Remote Control
The remote control can be used anytime the vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
Press the button to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signals will flash.
To disable or enable two-stage unlocking, press and hold both the lock
and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds . Disabling
two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of
the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking
mode was changed.
Locking the Doors
Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and
the turn signals will illuminate if all the doors and the trunk are closed.
Note: If any door or the trunk is not closed, or if the hood is not closed
on vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will chirp twice and the lamps will not illuminate.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Locks
65
Opening the Trunk
Press the button twice within three seconds to open the trunk.
Make sure the trunk is closed and latched before driving your vehicle. An
unlatched trunk may cause objects to fall out or block the driver’s rear
view.
Smart Locks
This feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if
your key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the
power door lock control, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door
will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the
ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key or
using the lock button on the remote entry transmitter.
Autolock (If Equipped)
The autolock feature will automatically lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition on,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, (for manual
transmission, the parking brake should not be engaged) and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is on and the vehicle
speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock (If Equipped)
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and the vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is switched off or
to accessory; and
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
66
Locks
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
switched off or to accessory.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock
Note: The autolock and autounlock features can be activated or
deactivated independently of each other:
• through your authorized dealer
• by using the information display.
Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure
that the active anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is off, and all
vehicle doors are closed.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and turn signal lamps illuminate when the integrated
keyhead transmitter is used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the on position, or
• the integrated keyhead transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
• When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the
ignition, the interior dome lamp and the turn signal lamps will illuminate.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and:
• 25 seconds elapse, or
• the key is inserted in the ignition.
Battery Saver
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the off position and a door is left open, and
in 30 minutes if the dome lamp control is left on and the ignition has
been turned to the off position. The battery saver will also shut off the
trunk lamps in 30 minutes if the trunk is left open.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Locks
67
TRUNK RELEASE
The remote trunk release button is
located on the center console. Press
the button to unlatch the trunk.
Interior Trunk Control Lockout (Convertible Vehicles Only)
This feature disables the interior trunk control. It helps prevent
unauthorized access to the trunk when the convertible top is open.
To disable the interior trunk control:
1. Make sure the vehicle is off and accessory power delay is not active.
2. Lock the vehicle using the remote control or the power door lock
switch.
To enable the interior trunk control:
• use the remote control to unlock the vehicle
• switch the ignition on.
The interior trunk control will now work normally.
Manual Trunk Release (Convertible Vehicles Only)
In the event of battery failure, you
can open the trunk using your
master key. The key cylinder is
located between the rear seatback
cushions on the driver’s side.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
68
Locks
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE
WARNING: Keep vehicle doors and luggage compartment locked
and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child’s reach.
Unsupervised children could lock themselves in the trunk and risk
injury. Children should be taught not to play in vehicles.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release handle that provides a means of
escape for children and adults if they become locked inside the luggage
compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves with the operation and location of
the release handle.
The handle is located inside the
luggage compartment either on the
luggage compartment door (lid) or
near the tail lamps. It is composed
of a material that will glow for hours
in darkness following brief exposure
to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the
luggage compartment door (lid) to
open from within the luggage
compartment.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Security
69
SECURILOCK® PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote
start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the
same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to
the key when starting the engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine
if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always take
your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
The system is an engine immobilization system. It is designed to help
prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed
to your vehicle is used. Using the wrong key may prevent the engine
from starting. A message may appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, a
malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition off.
Anti-Theft Indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
• When the ignition is off, the indicator will flash once every
two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning
as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is on, the indicator will glow for three seconds, then
turn off to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is on. If this occurs, switch the
ignition off then back on to make sure there was no electronic
interference with the programmed key. If your vehicle does not start, try
to start it with the second programmed key and if successful contact
your authorized dealership for key replacement. If the indicator still
flashes rapidly or glows steadily, your vehicle will not start. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible for service.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the vehicle.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
70
Security
Replacement of Integrated Keyhead Transmitters and Coded Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two integrated keyhead
transmitters.
The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as both a programmed
ignition key that operates all the locks and starts your vehicle, as well as
a remote keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can
be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be
integrated keyhead transmitters with remote entry functionality.
If your integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded
keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key, you will
need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes
need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Key
Note: A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your
vehicle. Only four of these eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitters or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program both
the engine immobilizer key code and the remote entry portion of the
remote control to your vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See your authorized dealer to have
the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are
not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Security
71
5. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed
coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition off
and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least six
seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
The key will start the vehicle’s engine and will operate the remote entry
system (if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter) if it has
been successfully programmed. The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, the theft indicator light may
flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8. Take
your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key programmed
if you are still unsuccessful.
Wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 to program
an additional key.
ANTI–THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)
The active anti-theft system is designed to warn you in the event of
unauthorized vehicle entry and is also designed to help prevent
unwanted towing of the vehicle.
You can choose what is monitored by arming the system in different
ways.
Partial Monitor Mode
To monitor the following:
• Doors
• Hood
• Trunk
Lock the vehicle using the key in the driver door key cylinder.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
72
Security
Full Monitor Mode
To monitor the following:
• Doors
• Hood
• Trunk
• Movement inside the vehicle (for convertible models, top must be fully
closed)
• Change in vehicle inclination (such as unwanted towing)
Lock the vehicle using the remote control or the power door lock control
with the accompanying door open and then close all doors.
Note: Do not choose full monitor mode if movement within the vehicle is
likely to occur or when the vehicle is in transport.
Note: For proper operation of the interior motion detection system,
ensure all windows are closed prior to arming the system. This will help
prevent accidental alarm activation due to external influences and ensure
proper interior motion detection. Additionally, the interior motion
sensing system will not arm if either door or the trunk is ajar.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure all integrated keyhead transmitters are brought to the authorized
dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the System
When armed, the active anti-theft system is designed to notify you of an
unauthorized entry. When unauthorized entry or towing occurs, the
system will flash the turn signal lamps and interior lamps and will sound
the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is out of the ignition. Any
of the following actions will arm the alarm system:
• Press the lock button on the remote control.
• Lock all doors using the interior power lock switch while the driver or
passenger door is open and then becomes closed.
• Lock the driver door with the key in the key lock cylinder (this will
not, however, arm the interior motion or vehicle incline sensing
systems).
There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur
before the vehicle becomes armed.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Security
73
Each door, the hood or the trunk is armed individually, and if any are
open, they must be closed for the system to enter the 20 second
countdown.
The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors, the hood and the
trunk are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the
20 second countdown. If any closure is not properly closed, the turn
signal lamps will not flash and that closure will not be armed.
Disarming the System
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter portion of
your integrated keyhead transmitter.
• Turn ignition to the on position with a valid programmed SecuriLock
key or integrated keyhead transmitter.
• Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter portion of
your integrated keyhead transmitter. This will only shut off the horn
and turn lamps when the alarm is sounding. The alarm system will still
be armed.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock the vehicle.
Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed
mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
Note: Unlocking the trunk inhibits the motion sensing system but the
system continues to monitor the doors, hood and vehicle incline. Once
the trunk becomes closed the motion sensing system will rearm.
Triggering the Anti-Theft System
The armed system will be triggered if:
• Any door, the hood or the trunk is opened without using the remote
entry transmitter portion of your integrated keyhead transmitter or
key in driver door cylinder.
• The ignition is turned to the on position with an invalid
unprogrammed SecuriLock key or integrated keyhead transmitter.
• The vehicle is towed or inclined.
• Motion is detected in the interior passenger compartment.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
74
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting
in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter.
1. Unlock the steering column.
2
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position.
1
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
A
B
C
-
+
E
D
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
A. Media
B. Volume down
C. Volume up
D. Seek up or next
E. Seek down or previous
Steering Wheel
Press the media button repeatedly to scroll through available audio
modes.
Press the seek buttons to select the next or previous stored preset or
track. Press and hold to select the next or previous frequency or seek
through a track.
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
A
-
B
+
A. Voice recognition
B. Phone mode
OK
See the SYNC or Navigation System chapter.
CRUISE CONTROL
See the Cruise Control chapter.
CNCL ON
RSM OFF
-
SET +
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
75
76
Steering Wheel
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
Type 1
Type 2
OK
See the Information Displays chapter.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wipers and Washers
77
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield in icy conditions before turning on
the windshield wipers.
Rotate the end of the control away
from you to increase the speed of
the wipers. Rotate toward you to
decrease the speed of the wipers.
OFF
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out.
Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
Press the end of the stalk to activate
the washer.
OFF
• A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold will activate the wipers and washer fluid for up
to 10 seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining
washer fluid.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
78
Lighting
LIGHTING CONTROL
A
B C
A. Off
B. Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps
C. Headlamps
A
High Beams
• Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate.
• Pull the lever toward you to
deactivate.
OFF
Headlamp Flasher
•Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
OFF
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Lighting
79
AUTOLAMPS (If equipped)
WARNING: In severe weather conditions, it may be necessary to
switch your headlamps on manually.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps, it will have the
windshield wiper rainlamp feature. When the windshield wipers are
turned to low- or high-speed wiping during daylight, and the headlamp
control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn on after a
brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
A
The headlamps will remain on for a
period of time after you switch the
ignition off. You can adjust the time
delay using the display controls in
the instrument cluster. See the
Information Displays chapter.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
• Move the control up or down to
adjust the intensity of the panel
lighting.
• Move the control to the full
upright position, past detent, to
turn on the interior lamps.
• Move the control down, past
detent, to turn off the interior
lights.
Note: The panel dimmer control works only in nighttime illumination
mode. It has no effect in daytime illumination mode. Also, selectable
features, such as gauge color and halo color, will not be available in
daytime illumination mode.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full dome On position to reset. This
will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
80
Lighting
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
You can set the delay time to keep the headlamps on for up to three
minutes after the ignition is turned off.
Follow the steps below to change the delay time (Steps 1 through 6
must be done within 10 seconds):
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the lighting control to the autolamp position.
3. Turn the lighting control to the off position.
4. Turn the ignition on.
5. Turn the ignition off.
6. Turn the lighting control to the autolamp position. The headlamps and
parking lamps will turn on.
7. Turn the lighting control to the off position when the desired delay
time has been reached. The headlamps and parking lamps will turn off.
You can set the headlamp exit delay to one of the following settings:
• Off
• 10 seconds
• 20 seconds
• 30 seconds
• 60 seconds
• 90 seconds
• 120 seconds
• 180 seconds.
Note: You can also adjust the time delay using the display controls in
the instrument cluster. See the Information Displays chapter.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Lighting
81
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
The system switches the headlamps on with a reduced output (vehicles
equipped with halogen headlamps) or turns the front fog lamps on
(vehicles equipped with HID headlamps) in low light situations.
To switch the system on:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Switch the lighting control to the off, autolamp or parking lamp
position.
3. Make sure the transmission selector lever is not in position P.
4. Make sure the parking brake is disengaged.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
A
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
The fog lamps can be turned on
when the lighting control is pulled
toward you and in the headlamps,
parking lamps or autolamps
positions.
The fog lamps will not operate
when the high beams are active.
82
Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
OFF
Note: An outage of any front turn signal lamp or the inner most of the
three-compartment rear turn signal lamps will result in a rapid flash rate.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome/Map lamps
The dome lamp lights when:
• Any door is opened.
• Any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
off.
• The instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up, past the
detent, until the courtesy lamps
come on.
The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of
the lamp.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Windows and Mirrors
83
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
AUTO
AUTO
Press or lift the switches to operate
the windows.
• Press the switch to the first
detent and hold to open the
window.
• Lift the switch to the first detent
and hold to close the window.
One-Touch Up or Down (Front Windows)
This feature automatically opens or closes the window.
Press or lift the switch completely and release. The window will fully
open or close. Press or lift it again to stop the window.
Restoring the One-Touch Up Functionality
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration with the door closed.
Calibrating with the door open will cause the window to continuously
bounce back.
Functionality may be lost under low battery power conditions.
To reset this function after restoring full battery power:
1. Pull the switch to the one-touch up position.
2. Hold the switch until the glass reaches the stall position and continue
to hold for two seconds.
3. Press the switch down and operate the window to the full down
position. One-touch up will now be functional.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
84
Windows and Mirrors
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window
reaching the bounce-back position. The window will travel up with no
bounce-back protection. The window will stop if the switch is released
before the window is fully closed.
Short Drop Glass (Front Windows)
This feature lowers the glass when either door is opened to improve door
efforts and sealing. The glass returns to its closed position when the
door is closed.
Re-Calibrating a Window
Note: Perform short drop re-calibration with the doors closed.
Re-calibrating with doors open will cause the window to continuously
bounce back.
If a window will not raise again when the door is closed, use the switch
to fully raise the window, then hold the switch up for two seconds.
If a window will not lower when the door is opened:
1. Use the switch to fully lower the window, then hold the switch down
for two seconds.
2. Immediately after releasing the switch, pull the switch up to fully raise
the window and hold the switch up for two seconds.
Rear Power Windows (Convertible Only)
The rear quarter windows are operated by a single switch located at the
driver’s door window controls.
• Press and hold the switch to open the windows.
• Pull up and hold the switch to close the windows.
Manual Override
The rear quarter window switch will not operate when:
• the convertible top is moving
• the convertible top is not completely up or down.
The rear quarter windows can be manually raised if the switch does not
operate when the convertible top is completely up or down.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Windows and Mirrors
85
The following procedure must be performed within two minutes:
1. Switch the ignition off, then back on.
2. Press the rear window switch down three times.
3. Switch the ignition off, then back on.
4. Pull the rear window switch up and hold it for three seconds. The rear
windows will begin to start moving up.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch
the ignition off, or until either front door is opened.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
B
A
C
A. Left mirror
B. Off
C. Right mirror
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
The heated exterior mirrors switch on with the heated rear window. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors in the Climate Control chapter.
Pony Projection Lights (If Equipped)
Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up (or other types of contamination)
on the surface of the light lens can cause some non-permanent distortion
or reduced brightness of the image. Do not use abrasive materials to
clean the lens.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
86
Windows and Mirrors
The lights are located on the bottom of the mirror housings.
This feature will project an image onto the ground a short distance from
the vehicle whenever illuminated entry and exit is activated.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper
outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to assist you
by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind
spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the
traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
The image of the approaching
vehicle is small and near the inboard
edge of the main mirror when it is at
a distance. The image becomes
larger and begins to move outboard
across the main mirror as the vehicle
approaches (A). The image will
C
transition from the main mirror and
begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches
(B). The vehicle will transition to
your peripheral field of view as it
leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
B
A
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Windows and Mirrors
87
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also
have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or
down and from side to side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror.
Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised
rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are
detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal
reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
Slide-On-Rod
Rotate the visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for
extra sunlight coverage.
Retract the visor before moving it
back toward the windshield and
storing it.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
88
Windows and Mirrors
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
Lift the cover to switch on the lamp.
Flexible Visor Storage System
The system can accommodate various storage accessories. A sunglasses
clip and multi-function clip are provided.
To attach one of the accessories, do
the following:
1. Insert the provided removal tool
(on the accessory holder) or a coin
into the slot on the plug and rotate
one-quarter turn in either direction
to remove. It may be necessary to
rotate the visor until the plug drops
away from the opening. Place the
plug in the provided holder when
not in use.
2. Remove the accessory from the holder and insert the end of the
storage accessory into the visor opening. Rotate one-quarter turn in
either direction until the accessory snaps into place. Make sure the open
end of the accessory is facing away from the windshield.
3. Reverse the procedure to remove the accessory and replace the cap or
change to a different accessory.
Additional accessories are available from your authorized dealer. See the
Accessories chapter for more information.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Windows and Mirrors
89
SUNSHADE (IF EQUIPPED)
Use the sunshade to cover the glass roof inside your vehicle.
Use the center-mounted cup handle
to slide the shade open or closed.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
90
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Type 1
Cluster shown in standard measure. Metric similar.
A. Speedometer
B. Fuel gauge
C. Engine coolant temperature gauge
D. Tachometer
E. Information display. See Information displays for more information.
Fuel Gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the
ignition is on). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of
the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature,
the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant
temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
91
Type 2
A
B
C
E
D
Cluster shown in standard measure. Metric similar.
A. Speedometer
B. Information display. See the Information Displays chapter for more
information.
C. Tachometer
D. Fuel gauge
E. Engine coolant temperature gauge
Note: The instrument cluster gauges are backlit with white backlighting
when the headlamps are off. When the headlamps are on, you can select
one of the preset colors for the nighttime gauge backlighting or create
up to three custom colors using the MyColor® feature (if equipped).
Ambient color and halo color are also selectable. See the Information
Displays chapter for more information. When certain gauges enter a
warning state, they will be backlit in red.
Fuel Gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the
ignition is on). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of
the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
92
Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature,
the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant
temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
These indicators can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become
serious enough to cause expensive repairs. Many lights will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any light remains
on after starting the vehicle, refer to the respective system warning light
for additional information.
Airbag Readiness
If this light fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned on,
continues to flash or remains on, contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. A chime will sound when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Anti-lock Brake System
If the ABS light stays illuminated or continues to flash, a
malfunction has been detected. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Normal braking is still functional unless the
brake warning light also is illuminated.
Anti-theft System
Flashes when the SecuriLock® passive anti-theft system has
been activated.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
93
Brake System Warning Light
To confirm the brake system warning light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the on
position when the engine is not running, or in a position
between on and start, or by applying the parking brake when the ignition
is turned to the on position.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not
engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake
fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause
brake failure and the risk of personal injury.
Charging System
Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with
the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Door Ajar
Illuminates when the ignition is on and any door is not
completely closed.
Engine Oil Pressure
Illuminates when the oil pressure falls below the normal range.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
94
Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let it
cool.
High Beams
Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are on.
Low Fuel
Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
Illuminates when your tire pressure is low. If the light remains
on at start-up or while driving, the tire pressure should be
checked. When the ignition is first turned to on, the light will
illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light
does not turn on or begins to flash, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power
Illuminates when a powertrain fault has been detected. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Safety Belt
Reminds you to fasten your safety belt. A Belt-Minder® chime
will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
95
Service Engine Soon
The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the service engine soon
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine
soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing in the Fuel and Refueling chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. See On-board
Diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter. If the light is
blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic
converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Speed Control (if equipped)
The speed control system indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system is in:
• On (amber light): Illuminates when the speed control system is turned
on. Turns off when the speed control system is turned off.
• Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the speed control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged.
Stability Control System
Illuminates when the AdvanceTrac®/Traction control is active.
If the light remains on, have the system serviced immediately.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
96
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control System Off
Illuminates when AdvanceTrac®/Traction control has been
disabled by the driver.
Turn Signal
Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard
warning flasher is turned on. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Upshift (if equipped)
To maximize fuel economy, this light illuminates when the
manual transmission should be shifted to the next highest gear.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Key In Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory
position and the driver’s door is opened.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds when the keyless vehicle is in RUN and the driver’s door is
opened.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off
(the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle.
If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking
brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Information Displays
97
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable
laws.
Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information
display controls located on the steering wheel. Corresponding
information is displayed in the information display.
Information Display Controls (Type 1)
• Press the INFO button to scroll
through trip, fuel usage and
MyKey® information.
• Press the SETUP button to scroll
through various vehicle feature
settings.
• Press the RESET button to
choose settings, reset information
and confirm messages.
Info
Press INFO repeatedly to cycle
through the following features:
TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release INFO
until the A or B trip appears in the display (this represents the trip
mode). Press and release RESET to reset trip information .
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
98
Information Displays
MYKEY MILES (km)
For more information, see the MyKey® chapter.
MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
AVG MPG (L/100 km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
MPG (L/km)
This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from ↓
poor economy to ↑ excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows ↓, one or no bars
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
TIMER
Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time.
To operate, do the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET until the timer resets.
Blank Screen
The display will be blank after cycling through all of the Info menu items.
System Check and Vehicle Feature Customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly
to cycle through the following
features:
Note: Not all personalization items will appear unless your vehicle is so
equipped.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Information Displays
99
RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
When this message appears, press the
RESET button and the information
display will begin to cycle through the
following systems and provide a status
of the item if needed.
1. XXX% OIL LIFE
2. CHARGING SYSTEM
3. DOORS STATUS
4. TRUNK STATUS
5. BRAKE SYSTEM
6. FUEL LEVEL
7. MYKEY DISTANCE (if MyKey® is programmed)
8. MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED
9. ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED
Note: Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
OIL LIFE
This displays the remaining oil life.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the information center
and according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change perform
the following:
1. Press and release SETUP to display OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold RESET for two seconds and release to reset the oil life
to 100%.
STEERING FEEL
This feature allows three modes of steering feel.
Press RESET to cycle through the settings of:
• STANDARD– Provides a balance between a comfort and sport feel.
• SPORT– Slightly higher effort required for steering with more road
force felt through the steering wheel. See note below.
• COMFORT– Slightly less effort required for steering with less road
force felt through the steering wheel.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
100
Information Displays
Note: When AdvanceTrac® sport mode is on or when AdvanceTrac®
and traction control are off, the steering feel will be locked in sport
mode. The display will show STEERING FEEL <SPORT> LOCKED and
the steering feel will not be selectable.
HALO LIGHT
Turns the halo lighting around the gauges on or off.
Press and hold RESET to turn the feature on or off.
AMBIENT LIGHT
Turns the ambient lighting on or off. Ambient lighting provides accent
lighting in various locations, such as footwell areas, cup holders and the
center console bin. The parking lamps or headlamps must be on to use
ambient lighting.
Press and hold RESET to turn the feature on or off.
AMBIENT DIM
Use this to adjust the brightness of the ambient lighting.
Press RESET to choose the various settings.
GAUGE COLOR, AMBIENT COLOR, HALO COLOR
GAUGE COLOR: The instrument cluster gauges are backlit with white
backlighting when the headlamps are off. When the headlamps are on, you
can select one of the preset colors for the nighttime gauge backlighting.
Note: A gauge in a warning condition will be lit red when the headlamps
are on.
AMBIENT COLOR: You can select one of the preset colors for ambient
lighting.
HALO COLOR: You can select one of the preset colors for halo lighting.
Note: Headlamps or parking lamps must be on to set up colors.
To choose colors for the gauges, halo color or ambient lighting do the
following:
1. Press SETUP to reach the GAUGE COLOR, AMBIENT COLOR, or
HALO COLOR menu.
2. Press RESET to scroll through the following color options:
• ICE BLUE
• BLUE
• WHITE
• ORANGE
• GREEN
• RED
• PURPLE
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Information Displays
101
UNITS
Displays the current units English or Metric.
Press RESET to change from English to Metric.
AUTOLAMP (SEC)
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
Press RESET to select the new autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20, 30,
60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
AUTOLOCK
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear and driven.
Press RESET to turn autolock on or off.
AUTOUNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
Press RESET to turn autounlock on or off.
REAR PARK AID
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when the transmission is in R.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP/ CLEAR MYKEY
For more information, see the MyKey® chapter.
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
Allows you to choose which language for the information display.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles through each
of the language choices.
Press and hold RESET for two seconds to set the language choice.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
102
Information Displays
Information Messages
See Information Messages later in this chapter for more information.
Information Display Controls (Type 2)
• Press the up and down arrow
buttons to scroll through and
highlight the options within a
menu.
• Press the right arrow button to
enter a sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to
exit a menu.
• Press the OK button to choose
and confirm a setting or message
.
Main Menu
You can access the menus using the information display control.
• Gauge Mode
• Trip A/B
• Fuel Economy
• Track Apps (Track use only)
• Settings
• Information
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Information Displays
103
†Gauge Mode
Air/Fuel Ratio
Virtual gauge shown
Vacuum inHG / Virtual gauge shown
Boost psi
(Shelby®
GT500®)
Cyl Head
Virtual gauge shown
Inlet Air
Virtual gauge shown
Oil Press.
No virtual gauge available
Oil Temp.
Virtual gauge shown
Trans temp
Virtual gauge shown
(auto
transmission
only)
Voltage
Virtual gauge shown
†See Virtual Gauges later in this section for more information.
Gauges Detail
†Trip A / B
Trip time
Trip distance
Fuel used
Avg mpg(L/100km)
Odometer (displays in lower line and may display in other menus)
†See Trip Computer later in this section for more information.
Fuel Economy
Fuel Econ.
Instant MPG (L/100km)
mi (km) to E
AVG MPG (L/100km)
Fuel Hist.: shows Duration: 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes, 30 Minutes, Last 5
fuel usage as a
Resets. The graph is updated each minute with the
bar graph based fuel economy that was achieved during the prior 5,
on time. The
10, 30 minutes of driving.
duration time can
be changed.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
104
Information Displays
†Track Apps
Accelerometer
Acceleration timer
Brake Performance
Dashboard
Launch Control Off/On / RPM Setting
Screen (Shelby® (Shelby®
GT500®)
GT500®)
View/Clear Results
†See Track apps later in this section for more information.
Driver Assist
Vehicle
Settings
Rear Park Aid
On/Off
Autolamp Delay Off or XXX seconds
Locks
Autolock
On/Off
Autounlock
On/Off
Menu Control
Standard: With standard set,
pressing the up/down arrows from
a lower level menu will escape to
the main menu.
Memory On: With memory on set,
pressing the up/down arrows will
navigate to the previous lower
level menu.
Oil Life Reset
Set to XXX% (Hold OK to Reset)
Shiftpoint
Shiftlamp
On/Off
(Shelby®
Shiftpoint
1500–7000 RPM
GT500®)
Shifttone
On/Off
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Information Displays
Vehicle
Settings
Dampers
Sport / Normal
(Shelby®
GT500®)
Steering Feel
Standard
Sport
Comfort
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
105
Sport Locked:
This will display
when
AdvanceTrac®
sport mode is
on or when
AdvanceTrac®
and traction
control are off.
The steering
feel will be
locked in sport
mode and
steering feel
will not be
selectable.
106
†MyColor (if
equipped)
MyKey
*Language
Information Displays
Settings
Ice Blue, White, Green, Purple,
Blue, Orange, Red, MyColor 1, 2,
3
Halo
Halo Light
On/Off
Halo Color
Ice Blue, White,
Green, Purple,
Blue, Orange,
Red, MyColor 1,
2, 3
Ambient Light
Ambient Light
On/Off
Ambient Dim
High/Low
Ambient Color
Ice Blue, White,
Green, Purple,
Blue, Orange,
Red, MyColor 1,
2, 3
1–5
Set MyColor 1, 2,
Red
3 (create your
own color by
adjusting the
Green
levels (1–5) of
the three
primary colors – Blue
red, green, and
blue)
Create MyKey
Hold OK to create MyKey
*The following only display if MyKey is programmed:
*AdvanceTrac
Always On / Selectable
*MAX Speed
80 MPH (130 km/h) or Off
*Speed Warning 45, 55 or 65 MPH (75, 90 or
105 km/h), or Off
*Volume Limiter On/Off
*Clear MyKey
Hold OK to Clear MyKey
English, Español, Français
Gauge Color
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Information Displays
107
Settings
Units
English or Metric
System Reset
Hold OK to Reset System to Factory Default
†The instrument cluster gauges are backlit white when the headlamps
are off. When the headlamps are on, you can select one of the preset
colors or MyColor 1, 2, 3 for the nighttime gauge backlighting. A gauge
in a warning condition will be backlit red when the headlamps are on.
*Track Application features and messages in the information display
are only available in English.
MyKey
System Check
Information
Admin Keys (Number of admin keys)
MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed)
MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a
programmed MyKey)
Some items will only display during a system check
if a problem has been detected. If an issue exists on
one of the monitored systems, the number of
warnings that need immediate attention will display
in red and the number of informational warnings will
display in amber. Use the up/down arrow buttons to
scroll through the list; press the right arrow button
to display specific information on the highlighted
warning.
TRIP COMPUTER (Trip A and B)
Resetting or Pausing the Trip Computer
• Press OK to pause the Trip A or B screen, press again to un-pause.
• Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
Trip Time
Registers the time of individual journeys.
Trip Distance
Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
Fuel Used
Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
108
Information Displays
Average MPG (L/100km)
Shows the average distance traveled per unit of fuel used for a given
trip.
Odometer
Registers the total mileage of the vehicle.
VIRTUAL GAUGES
Note: In order to provide real-time values, some gauges may display
more value fluctuation than others during normal operation.
Some gauges shown in standard measure. Metric similar.
AIR FUEL RATIO
Displays the current air to fuel mixture in the
engine.
VACUUM inHG / BOOST psi (Shelby® GT500®)
See the Shelby GT500 Supplement.
CYLINDER HEAD TEMP (IF EQUIPPED)
Displays the engine’s cylinder head temperature.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Information Displays
109
INLET AIR TEMP
Displays the temperature of the air in the cold air
inlet tube.
OIL TEMP
Displays the engine oil temperature. If the
temperature rises to the red area, stop in a safe place
and let the vehicle cool. If the problem persists, see
your authorized dealer.
TRANS TEMP (Automatic Transmission only)
Displays the transmission fluid operating temperature.
If the temperature rises to the red area, stop in a safe
place and let the transmission cool. If the problem
persists, see your authorized dealer.
VOLTS
Displays the vehicle’s battery voltage. If the voltage
is consistently too high or very low, see your
authorized dealer.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
110
Information Displays
TRACK APPS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Track Apps is for track use only. Remember that
even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It is
always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can
cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal
injury or property damage.
Note: Track Apps are for track use only. They are not to be used under
any other driving conditions.
Note: Viewed or cleared results cannot be used unless the vehicle is at a
complete stop. The right arrow on the display menu will be inactive.
1/4 mile results may not be displayed if the vehicle does not reach
100 mph (160 km/h) during the track run.
Accelerometer
Displays the vehicle rate of acceleration/deceleration.
• The red dot will move toward the area of acceleration/deceleration.
When accelerating/decelerating left, the red dot will move to the right on
the accelerometer. This is considered LEFT acceleration/deceleration.
When accelerating/decelerating right, the red dot will move to the left on
the accelerometer. This is considered RIGHT acceleration/deceleration.
• The rates of acceleration/deceleration are shown on the screen.
Acceleration Timer
Displays the vehicle’s rate of acceleration.
1. Choose desired speed or distance.
2. Choose Automatic Start or Countdown Start.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Information Displays
111
Brake Performance
Displays the vehicle’s rate of deceleration.
1. Choose desired speed to start recording data.
2. Follow the on-screen prompts.
Dashboard Screen (Shelby® GT500®)
For dashboard screen information, see the Shelby GT500 Supplement.
Launch Control (Shelby® GT500®)
For launch control information, see the Shelby GT500 Supplement.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not
all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have.
Press the RESET button for Type 1 displays or the OK button for Type 2
displays to acknowledge and remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages will be removed automatically after
a short time. Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can
access the menus.
AdvanceTrac® /
Traction Control
Messages
SERVICE
ADVANCETRAC
ADVANCETRAC
OFF
ADVANCETRAC ON
TRACTION
CONTROL OFF
Action / Description
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® system has
detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® system has
been disabled by the driver.
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® system has
been enabled by the driver.
Displayed when the traction control system
has been turned off.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
112
Information Displays
Alarm/Security
Messages
TO STOP ALARM
START VEHICLE
SECURITY EVENT
OCCURRED
Battery and
Charging System
Messages
CHECK CHARGING
SYSTEM
Brake System
Messages
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL LOW
CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM
PARK BRAKE
ENGAGED
Door Messages
X DOOR AJAR
TRUNK AJAR
Action / Description
Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is
armed and the vehicle is entered using the key
on the driver’s side door. In order to prevent
the perimeter alarm system from triggering,
the ignition must be turned to start or on
before the 12 second chime expires.
Displayed when the active anti-theft system
was activated since the prior ignition cycle.
Action / Description
Displayed when the charging system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Action / Description
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the
brake system should be inspected immediately.
Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Displayed when the parking brake is set and
the vehicle is in motion.
Action / Description
Displayed when the corresponding door is not
completely closed.
Displayed when the trunk is not completely
closed.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Information Displays
113
Fuel Messages
CHECK FUEL FILL
INLET
FUEL LEVEL LOW
Action / Description
Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be
properly closed.
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
Key Messages
COULD NOT
PROGRAM
INTEGRATED KEY
Action / Description
Displayed when an attempt is made to
program a fifth integrated key. For more
information, see the Security chapter.
Maintenance
Messages
ENGINE OIL
CHANGE SOON
OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
LOW
SERVICE POWER
STEERING
SERVICE POWER
STEERING NOW
POWER STEERING
ASSIST FAULT
Action / Description
Displayed when the engine oil life is nearing
its end.
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%.
Displayed when the oil level is low. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place and check the oil level.
Refill if needed. If the oil level remains low or
becomes low again, see your authorized dealer.
The power steering system has detected a
condition that requires service. See your
authorized dealer.
The power steering system has detected a
condition within the power steering system
that requires service immediately. See your
authorized dealer.
The power steering system has disabled power
steering assist due to a system error. See your
authorized dealer.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
114
Information Displays
MyKey® Messages
MYKEY ACTIVE
DRIVE SAFELY
ADVTRAC ON
MYKEY SETTING
Action / Description
Displayed when MyKey® is active.
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use when
trying to disable the AdvanceTrac® system
and the optional setting is on.
VEHICLE SPEED
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
80 MPH MAX
is 80 mph (130 km/h).
VEHICLE NEAR
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
TOP SPEED
is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
TOP SPEED MYKEY Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
SETTING
is 80 mph (130 km/h).
SPEED LIMITED TO Displayed when starting the vehicle and
MyKey® is in use and the MyKey speed limit
80 MPH
is on.
CHECK SPEED
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and the
optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds
DRIVE SAFELY
a preselected speed.
BUCKLE UP TO
Displayed when a MyKey® is in use and
Belt-Minder® is activated.
UNMUTE AUDIO
MYKEY COULD NOT Displayed when an attempt is made to
program a spare key using two existing
PROGRAM
MyKeys.
Park Aid Messages
Action / Description
CHECK REAR PARK Displayed when the transmission is in R
(Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
AID
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Information Displays
Tire Messages
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR FAULT
TIRE PRESSURE
SENSOR FAULT
Track Key Messages
TRACKEY ACTIVE
TRACK USE ONLY
TRACKEY IDLE
ENABLED
115
Action / Description
Displays when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure.
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring
system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer.
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is
malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use.
For more information on how the system
operates under these conditions. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Action / Description
Displayed when a trackey is in use. See the
Boss® 302 supplement for more information.
Displayed when a trackey is in use. See the
Boss® 302 supplement for more information.
ELECTRONIC COMPASS
The compass heading displays in the center-integrated display.
Note: Driving near large buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful
broadcast antenna may affect the compass reading. Magnetic or metallic
objects placed in, on or near your vehicle may also affect compass
accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass
corrects itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. See Compass calibration adjustment.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
116
Information Displays
Compass Zone Adjustment
When something affects the compass readings, typically the compass
corrects itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary.
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
3 2
1
15
map.
4
14 2. Turn ignition to the on position.
13 3. Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio
preset buttons together for
5
12
approximately five seconds until
ZONE XX appears.
4. Press and release the 7 and 9
6
7 8 9 1011
radio preset buttons together,
repeatedly until ZONE XX
changes to the correct zone
(1–15).
5. The direction displays, and the zone updates, when you release the
buttons.
Compass Calibration Adjustment
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and becomes noticeable as your vehicle
crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting eliminates this error.
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (such as the heater, air conditioning or wipers) and make
sure no vehicle doors are open.
1. Start your vehicle.
2. Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio preset buttons together for
approximately 10 seconds until CAL appears. Release the buttons.
3. Drive your vehicle in a circle slowly (under than 3 mph [5 km/h]); it
may take up to five circles to complete calibration.
4. Calibration is complete when the CAL display changes to the
direction value (such as N, S, E or W).
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Audio System
117
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Distance and
Strength
Terrain
Station Overload
Radio reception factors
The further you travel from an FM station,
the weaker the signal and the weaker the
reception.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result in the audio
system muting.
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.75-inch (12 centimeter)
audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into
the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become
jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage
CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved
CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do
not clean in a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
118
Audio System
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. Note: The maximum
number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation
through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand
how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may
be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with the
.mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This
enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a specific
folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in the
current folder.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Audio System
119
AM/FM/CD/SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO
S
R
Q
P
O
N
1
2
3
4
•DIRECT
TEXT
SCAN
CAT/FOLD
5
6
8
7
0
9
MENU
CLOCK #
SOUND
PHONE
SEEK
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
LOAD
VOL
M
L
AM/FM
CD
SIRIUS
AUX
K J
TUNE
OK
H
I
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS satellite radio, may not be available
in your location. Check with your authorized dealer.
A. Memory presets:
• Store your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to any
station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns and
PRESET # SAVED appears in the display.
• Save presets automatically by using the autoset feature. Press MENU
repeatedly until AUTO PRESET ON/OFF appears in the display. Use the
SEEK buttons to turn AUTO PRESET to ON, and either wait five
seconds for the search to initiate or press OK to immediately start the
search. If you press another control within those five seconds, the search
does not start. The system fills the presets with the 10 strongest stations;
the station stored in preset 1 begins playing. If there are fewer than 10
strong stations, the system stores the last one in the remaining presets.
Note: Autoset does not delete your original preset stations.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
120
Audio System
Note: In order to re-run the autoset features, you must first turn it off
before turning it back on.
B. MENU: Press this button to access different audio features:
• Compression brings the soft and loud CD passages together for a
more consistent listening level.
• Shuffle plays the current CD tracks in random order.
• RDS Radio allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a certain
category of music format such as CLASSIC, COUNTRY, JAZZ/RB or
ROCK.
• SIRIUS allows you to access different satellite radio options.
C. CLOCK: Press this button to set the time. Use the memory presets
buttons to enter the time, and then press OK.
D. PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the
SYNC® system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information. If your
vehicle is not equipped with SYNC®, the display reads NO PHONE.
E. SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass,
Balance and Fade. Use the SEEK or TUNE controls to change the settings.
• Bass levels can be increased or decreased.
• Treble levels can be increased or decreased.
• Balance adjusts the sound between left and right speakers.
• Fade adjusts the sound between the front and back speakers.
• Speed Compensated Volume adjusts the volume to compensate for
speed and wind noise. You can set the system between off and +7.
• All Seat Mode/Driver Seat Mode/Top Down Mode (if equipped)
optimizes sound quality for the chosen seating position.
• DSP Mode (if equipped) allows you to choose between STEREO
SURROUND mode and STEREO mode.
F. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
G. CD slot: Insert a CD.
H. TUNE/OK/Play/Pause:
• In radio mode, turn the control to manually search through the radio
frequency band.
• In SIRIUS mode, turn the control to find the next or previous
available satellite radio station.
• OK allows you to confirm commands with phone and media features.
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC®, see the SYNC® chapter for
more information.
• Play/Pause allows you to play or pause a track when listening to a CD.
I. AUX: Press this button to access media through your auxiliary input
jack. If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC®, see the SYNC® chapter
for more information.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Audio System
121
J. CD: Press the CD button to access CD and MP3 modes.
• The disc begins to play where it left off. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC
appears in the display.
• Press the SEEK buttons to access the previous or next track. Press
and hold the SEEK buttons to quickly reverse or fast forward within
the same track.
K. SIRIUS: Press this button to access different satellite radio modes.
Note: SIRIUS® satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS®
radio subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
L. AM/FM: Press this button to select a frequency band.
M. On/Off/VOL: Press the power control to turn the system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
• Press this button to switch the system off and on.
• Turn it to adjust the volume.
N. LOAD: This control is not operational. To load a CD, insert the disc,
label side up, into the CD slot.
O. CAT/FOLD:
• In SIRIUS mode, press this button to switch between turning the
most recently selected satellite radio category off or on.
• In MP3 mode, press this button, then use the SEEK buttons to
access the previous or next folder.
P. SCAN:
• In radio mode, press this button to hear a brief sampling of all radio
stations.
• In SIRIUS mode, press this button to hear a brief sampling of all
available channels. If you select a specific category, press SCAN for a
brief sampling of all available channels within the selected category.
• In CD and MP3 modes, press this button to hear a brief sampling of
all tracks on the current disc or MP3 folder.
Q. DIRECT:
• In radio mode, press this button to select the desired radio frequency
(such as 93.9) using the memory preset numbers (0–9).
• In SIRIUS mode, press this button to enter the desired channel (such
as 002) using the memory preset buttons. If you only enter one digit,
and press OK, the system goes to that channel. If you enter three
digits, the system automatically goes to that channel, if available. You
may cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT. If you enter an invalid
station number, INVALID CHANNEL appears in the display and the
system continues playing the current station.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
122
Audio System
• In CD mode, press this button to enter the desired track number
using the memory preset buttons. The system then begins playing
that track.
• In MP3 mode, press this button to enter a memory preset button of
the desired folder. The system advances to that specific folder.
R. TEXT:
• MP3 mode, press this button to view Album (AL), Folder (FL), Song
(SO) and Artist (AR) in the display, if available.
• In text mode, sometimes the display requires additional text to show.
When the < / > indicator is on, press this button, then use the SEEK
buttons to view the additional text.
S. SEEK:
• In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these
buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
• In SIRIUS mode, press one of these buttons to select the previous or
next channel. If a specific category is selected (such as Jazz, Rock or
News), use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the
selected category.
• In CD and MP3 modes, press one of these buttons to select the
previous or next track.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is moving.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Audio System
123
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is
moving. Hard objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension
cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be
safely stored while your vehicle is moving.
The auxiliary input jack (AIJ)
allows you to connect and play
music from your portable music
player through your vehicle
speakers. You can use any portable
music player designed for use with
headphones. Your audio extension
cable must have male 1⁄8-inch (3.5
millimeter) connectors at each end.
1. Make sure your vehicle, radio and portable music player are turned
off and the transmission is in position P.
2. Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the AIJ.
3. Turn on the radio. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn on your portable music player and adjust its volume to 1⁄2 the
maximum.
6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display. You should
hear music from your device even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the
volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and
forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
124
Audio System
USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
LINE IN
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
The USB port allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory
sticks and charge devices (if
supported). See the SYNC chapter
for more information.
Audio System
125
SATELLITE RADIO INFORMATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Satellite Radio Channels
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a
complete list of SIRIUS® satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com
in the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS® at
1–888–539–7474.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential Satellite Radio Reception Issues
Antenna
For optimal reception performance, keep the
obstructions
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and the audio system
may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to
interference
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
126
Audio System
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS® reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or
delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.
SIRIUS® satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS®
satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of
sale or lease of your vehicle. See your authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS® satellite
radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS® at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio
account. When in satellite radio mode, you can view this number by
pressing SIRIUS and memory preset 1 at the same time.
Troubleshooting
SIRIUS® Troubleshooting
Radio Display
Condition
Acquiring
Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS®
There is an internal
system failure
module or system
failure present.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Tips
Possible Action
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
If this message does
not clear shortly, or
with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See
your authorized dealer
for service.
Audio System
127
SIRIUS® Troubleshooting Tips
Radio Display
Condition
Possible Action
Invalid Channel
The channel is no
Tune to another
longer available.
channel or choose
another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does Contact SIRIUS® at
not include this
1–888–539–7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal
The signal is lost from The signal is blocked.
the SIRIUS satellite or When you move into
SIRIUS tower to your an open area, the
signal should return.
vehicle antenna.
Updating
Update of channel
No action required.
programming in
The process may take
progress.
up to three minutes.
Call SIRIUS®
Your satellite service is Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474
no longer available.
1–888–539–7474 to
resolve subscription
issues.
No Channels Available All the channels in the Use the channel guide
selected channels are to turn off the Lock or
Skip function on that
either skipped or
station.
locked.
Subscription Updated SIRIUS has updated
No action required.
the channels available
for your vehicle.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
128
Climate Control
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
R
K
E
A/C
MAX
A/C
F
J
G
I
H
A. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
B. Rear defrost: Turns the heated windows and mirrors on and off. See
Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more
information.
C. Air distribution control: You can set the air distribution control to
any position between the symbols.
Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents and floor vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
and demister vents.
Distributes air through the floor vents.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Control
129
D. A/C: Press to turn air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools
the vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting
your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three
minutes.
E. Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When the LED on the button is lit, the air currently in
the passenger compartment is being recirculated. Using recirculated air
can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
F. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This position is more economical and efficient
than normal A/C.
G. Passenger heated seat control (if equipped): Turns the passenger
heated seat on and off. See Heated seats in the Seats chapter for more
information.
H. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated
in your vehicle. Turn to select the desired temperature.
I. Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your
vehicle. Turn to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch
the fan off, the windshield may fog up.
J. Driver heated seat control (if equipped): Turns the driver heated
seat on and off. See Heated seats in the Seats chapter for more
information.
K. Power: Press to turn the system on and off. When the system is off,
outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
130
Climate Control
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM)
A
B
L
C
K
D
J
E
I
H
G
F
Note: To use the touchscreen controls, see the Touchscreen climate
controls in the Navigation System chapter.
A. CLIMATE: Control the system through the touchscreen display. See
Touchscreen functions later in this section.
B. Rear defrost: Turns the heated windows and mirrors on and off. See
Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more
information. If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this button
turns them on also.
C. A/C: Press to turn air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools
the vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting
your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three
minutes.
Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: A/C turns on automatically in MAX A/C, Defrost and Floor/Defrost.
D. Passenger temperature control: Press to increase or decrease the
air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
E. Passenger heated seat control (if equipped): Turn the passenger
heated seat on and off. See Heated seats in the Seats chapter for more
information.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Control
131
F. Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When the LED on the button is lit, the air currently in
the passenger compartment is being recirculated. Using recirculated air
can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected
or can be turned on manually in any airflow mode except Defrost.
G. Fan speed control: Press + or - to increase or decrease the volume
of air circulated in your vehicle.
H. AUTO: Press to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically
determines fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or
recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected
temperature.
I. Driver temperature control: Press to increase or decrease the air
temperature on the driver side of the vehicle.
This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone
operation is disengaged.
J. Driver heated seat control (if equipped): Turn the driver heated seat
on and off. See Heated seats in the Seats chapter for more information.
K. Power: Press to turn the climate control system on and off. When the
system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
The system status in the touchscreen is also turned off. When the power
is turned back on, the system defaults to fully automatic control.
L. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
GENERAL OPERATING TIPS
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather, select
Defrost. Temperature and fan speed can also be increased to improve
clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
132
Climate Control
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start-up or until the vehicle has been aired out.
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into position P (vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission) to continue to receive cool air from your
A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance in A/C mode, press MAX A/C.
For maximum cooling performance in panel or panel/floor modes:
1. Move temperature control to the coolest setting.
2. Select A/C and recirculated air to provide colder airflow.
3. Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
comfort.
To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold or humid weather:
1. Select Floor/Panel.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
6. To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the
vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather, select
Defrost. Temperature and fan speed can also be increased to improve
clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start-up or until the vehicle has been aired out.
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Control
133
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into position P (vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission) to continue to receive cool air from your
A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance in AUTO mode, press MAX A/C.
For maximum cooling performance in manual override control:
1. Choose Panel, A/C, and recirc controls.
2. Set the temperature to LO.
3. Set the fan to the highest blower setting.
To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold or humid weather:
1. Select Floor/Panel.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
6. To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the
vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Heated Rear Window
Note: The vehicle must be running to use this feature.
Press the control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. Press the
control again within 15 minutes to switch it off. It turns off automatically
after approximately 15 minutes, or when you switch the ignition off.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions could
cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both mirrors are heated to remove ice, mist and fog when the rear
window defroster is activated.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
134
Climate Control
CABIN AIR FILTER
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign
objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in
place could result in degradation or damage to the system.
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which is located just in
front of the windshield under the cowl grille on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
The particulate air filtration system is designed to reduce the
concentration of airborne particles, such as dust, spores and pollen, in
the air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The particulate
filtration system gives the following benefits to customers:
• Improves the customer’s driving comfort by reducing particle
concentration.
• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness.
• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits.
For more information regarding the interval at which you should replace
the cabin air filter, see the Scheduled Maintenance chapter.
For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an
authorized dealer.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Seats
135
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seat
back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat back as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seat backs to
reduce the risk of injury in a crash or during heavy braking or
when stopping suddenly.
When you use them properly, the
seat, head restraint, safety belt and
airbags will provide optimum
protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow
these guidelines:
• Do not recline the seat back
more than 30 degrees from
vertical.
• Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as
possible.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of
your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches (250 millimeters) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can
maintain full control of your vehicle.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
136
Seats
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in or
operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its proper
position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
WARNING: Install the head restraint properly to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Note: Before adjusting any head restraint, adjust the seat back to an
upright driving or riding position. Properly adjust the head restraint so
that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and
positioned as close as possible to the back of your head. For occupants
of extremely tall stature, adjust the head restraint to its full up position.
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
Front Seat Head Restraints
(If Equipped)
The head restraints consist of:
B
A. An energy absorbing head
restraint
C
B. Two steel stems
D
C. Guide sleeve adjust and release
button
D. Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button
• Raise: Pull up on the head restraint (A).
• Lower: Press and hold the guide sleeve adjust and release button (C)
and push down on the head restraint (A).
• Remove: Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest
adjustment position and then press and hold both the adjust and
release button (C) and the unlock and remove button (D), then pull
up on the head restraint.
A
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Seats
137
• Reinstall: Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the
head restraint down until it locks.
Front Seat Non-adjustable Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of a trimmed foam covering
over the upper structure of the seat
back.
Properly adjust the seat back to an upright driving/riding position, so
that the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of
your head.
Rear Seat Non-adjustable Outboard Head Restraints
The second row outboard non-adjustable head restraints can be rotated
forward to improve rear vision when there are no rear occupants.
The non-adjustable head restraints
A consist of:
A. a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure
B. a rotation button.
B
Press the rotation button to rotate the head restraint forward in order to
improve rear vision when there are no rear seat occupants.
Properly adjust the head restraint to an upright driving or riding position
by lifting up on the head restraint until it locks into its original position.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
138
Seats
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints may have a tilting feature for extra comfort. To
tilt the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seat back to an upright driving or
riding position.
2. Tilt the head restraint forward by gently pulling
the top of the head restraint.
Once it is in its forward-most position, tilt it forward once more to
release it to the upright position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head restraint backward after it is
tilted. Instead, continue tilting it forward until the head restraint releases
to the upright position.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver’s seat or seat back while the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Rock the seat backwards and forwards after
releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged.
Moving the seats backward and
forward
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Seats
139
Recline adjustment
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seat back upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
Adjusting the height of the
driver’s seat
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seat back when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Before returning the seat back to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seat back.
The power seat control is located
on the outboard side of the seat.
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to raise or lower the seat
cushion or to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
140
Seats
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
The power lumbar control is located on the top of the driver’s seat side
shield.
• Press one side of the control to
increase lower back firmness.
• Press the other side of the
control to decrease lower back
firmness.
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions, must
exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do
not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion, because this may cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or other pointed objects because this
may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury.
The heated seats will only function when the ignition is in the on position.
Note: Do not do the following:
• place heavy objects on the seat.
• operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seat control is located in the lower center of the instrument
panel.
To operate the heated seats:
• Press to activate.
• Press again to deactivate.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Seats
141
REAR SEATS
Rear Seat Entry and Exit
Use the seat back release to fold
the back of the front seat forward
for rear seat access. This release
handle is located on the upper back
of the front seat. The seat back
locks automatically when returned
to the normal position.
Use the recliner handle to return
the seat back to the desired
position.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
142
Seats
2nd Row Seat/Split-Folding Rear Seat (If Equipped)
WARNING: Before returning the seat back to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seat back. After returning the seat back to its original
position, pull on the seat back to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
One or both rear seat backs (coupe only) can be folded down to provide
additional cargo space.
To lower the seat back(s) from
inside the vehicle, be sure the head
restraint is in the upright position,
pull the strap to release the seat
back and then fold the seat back
down.
When raising the seat back(s), make sure you hear the seat latch into
place. Pull down on the seat back to ensure that it has latched.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 143
HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device
are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener
that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage
door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the function button codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or
replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held
garage door opener with a
three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun
visor.
The system includes two primary
features, a garage door opener and
a platform for remote activation of devices with the home. As well as
being programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators, security systems, entry
door locks, and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found on-line at www.homelink.com
or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
144 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Programming
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This will ensure
quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the garage and your key in the
ignition, turn the key so that it is in the on position.
2. Hold your hand-held, garage door
transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8
centimeters) away from the
HomeLink button you want to
program.
3. Press and hold both the
HomeLink button you want to
program and the hand-held
transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator light changes from
flashing slowly to rapidly, then release.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for 5 seconds,
then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door. If your
garage door does not operate, watch the HomeLink indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. Press and
release the programmed HomeLink button, and then begin programming
your garage door opener. See below for Steps 5 – 7.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, the HomeLink button is not programmed yet. Do the
following:
Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release the
hand-held transmitter button every 2 seconds. The HomeLink indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly once the HomeLink function
button recognizes and accepts the hand-held transmitter’s radio
frequency signal.
After programming the HomeLink button, follow Steps 5 – 7 as listed
below to program your garage door opener.
Note: You may need a ladder to
reach the unit and you may need to
remove the cover or lamp lens on
your garage door opener.
5. Press the learn button on the
garage door opener motor, and then
you have 30 seconds to complete
the next step.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 145
6. Return to your car.
7. Press and hold the function
button you want to program for
2 seconds, then release. Repeat this
step. Depending on your brand of
garage door opener, you may need
to repeat this sequence a third time.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps one through four.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual
buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two
function buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons
flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash,
release the buttons. The codes for
all buttons are erased.
Reprogramming a single button
To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com
or 1-800-355-3515.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
146 Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Programming HomeLink® to a Genie Intellicode® 2 garage door
opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode® 2 transmitter must already be
programmed to operate with the garage door opener.
Programing the transmitters
To program HomeLink® to the transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode. To do this
A. Red LED
B. Green LED
A
B
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand-held transmitter for
10 seconds. The LED light will change from green to green and red.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change to Programming
mode. If done properly the LED light will appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters) of the
button on the sun visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button on the sun visor you want to program. The
indicator light on the sun visor will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: the Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds. If
HomeLink® does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter
will need to be pressed again. If the Genie transmitter LED displays
green and red, release the button until the LED turns off before pressing
the button again.
Once HomeLink® has been programmed successfully, the Genie
transmitter must be changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change
from red to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change. If done correctly
the LED will turn green.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 147
Programming HomeLink® to the Genie Intellicode® garage door
opener motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor.
To program HomeLink® to the
garage door opener motor.
1. Press and hold the PROGRAM
button on the garage door opener
motor until both blue LED’s turn on.
2. Release the PROGRAM button.
Only the smaller round LED should
be on.
3. Press and release the program button. The larger purple LED will flash
Note: The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand-held transmitter’s
previously programmed button. Both indicator lights on the garage door
opener motor unit should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously programmed button on the sun visor for
2 seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
At this point, programming is complete.
Clearing a HomeLink® device
To erase programming from the three HomeLink® buttons, press and
hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash. The LED will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which time
both buttons should be released. Programming has now been erased, and
the led should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when
any of the three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
148
Auxiliary Power Points
AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the
cigarette lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter
can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will discharge.
There may be insufficient power to restart your engine.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power
point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt
DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter
element.
Note: Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the
battery from being discharged:
• Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be found:
• on the instrument panel
• in the center console storage compartment.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Storage Compartments
149
CENTER CONSOLE
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
Your vehicle may be equipped with
a variety of console features.
• Cupholders in the front of the console (Pull the door open to access.)
Remove the spacer from the cupholder to hold deeper cups.
• Lockable storage bin (Use the ignition key to lock or unlock the
console bin and press the latch to open the console.)
• Auxiliary power point
• Coin holder slots
• Audio input jack
• USB port (if equipped)
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
150
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle on dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after you
connect it. This is because the engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You may disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing
equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field
strength of radio noise.
When starting your vehicle, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before
and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have
difficulty starting the engine.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Starting and Stopping the Engine
151
IGNITION SWITCH
Note: Do not store the key in the ignition after the vehicle is turned off
and you have left the vehicle. This could cause a drain on the battery.
Note: In order to switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion,
shift to neutral and use the brakes to bring the vehicle to a safe stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, shift into park and turn the engine off.
Then, turn the key to the accessory or off position.
C
B
D
A
A. Off: The ignition is off.
B. Accessory: Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to
operate while the engine is not running.
C. On: All the electrical circuits are operational. Warning lights are
illuminated. This is the key position when driving.
D. Start: Cranks the engine. The engine may continue cranking for up to
10 seconds or until the vehicle starts. Release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
• Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission, make sure the
gearshift is in position P and the parking brake is set.
• If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission, make sure the
parking brake is set, then push the clutch pedal to the floor.
• Turn the key to on without turning the key to start.
Some warning lights briefly illuminate.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
152
Starting and Stopping the Engine
2. Select position P or N.
3. Turn the key to start the engine. The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, wait for a short period
of time and try again.
If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below
-13°F (-25°C), press the accelerator pedal slightly and try again.
If the engine does not start after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
follow this flooded engine procedure.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Select position P or N.
4. Start the engine.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell
exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods of
time, we recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 centimeters).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below
0°F (-18°C).
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Starting and Stopping the Engine
153
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This
allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment
includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association. This
extension cord must be able to be used outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors; it could
result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and the
heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could
cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of
combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly
connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean
them with a dry cloth, if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The
system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature
after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer
than three hours does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
154
Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if
misused or mishandled.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped
into an ungrounded fuel container.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never
allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling
your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel, such as
gasoline, is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of
fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling
155
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or
skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals,
serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the
skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a
physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
Choosing the Right Fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 15% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel fuel, fuel-methanol,
leaded fuel or any other fuel because it could damage or impair the
emission control system. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law.
Octane Recommendations
87
• 3.7L V6 engine
(R+M)/2 METHOD
Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an
octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with
octane levels below 87 are not recommended.
• 5.0L V8 engine
Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer fuels posted as “Regular” with an
octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
156
Fuel and Refueling
octane levels below 87 are not recommended. Premium fuel will provide
improved performance and is recommended for severe duty usage, such
as trailer tow.
• For Shelby GT500 octane requirements, see the Shelby GT500
Supplement.
• For Boss® 302 octane requirements. see the Boss® 302 Supplement.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily while you are using fuel with the recommended octane
rating, see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, crank time will take a few seconds longer
than normal. With keyless ignition, just start the engine. Crank time
will be longer than usual.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more information
on the service engine soon indicator, see to Warning Lamps and
Indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Refilling with a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the capless fuel system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the
ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel
system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling
157
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with the
capless fuel system and can damage it. The included funnel has been
specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
1. Locate the white plastic funnel in the spare tire
compartment.
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the capless fuel
system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose
of the funnel.
REFUELING
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle - this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel;
Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
158
Fuel and Refueling
Easy Fuel® No Cap Fuel System
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel filler door by pressing the center of the door about one
inch from the door’s rear edge.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system, and leave
the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping.
4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler
nozzle—allow about ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the
fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank
and not spill onto the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do
not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel
filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located within
the fuel filler housing and to the ground.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, a Check Fuel Fill Inlet
message may appear on the information display.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel
fill opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the
vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and allow the inlet to close
properly.
If this action corrects the problem, the message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn
off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more
hours with the engine off) followed by city or highway driving.
Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine
soon lamp to turn on as well.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling
159
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Filling the Tank
The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve
combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a
full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve
is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle
after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low–medium–high) each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click–offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers)
of driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2000 miles–3000 miles (3200
kilometers–4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or
fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy as follows:
Standard: Divide miles traveled by gallons used.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
160
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in Scheduled Maintenance
Information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft® or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling
161
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for complete emission warranty
information.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions
may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel®
No Cap Fuel System in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine start-up followed by mixed city or highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in
increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
162
Fuel and Refueling
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state, provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. See On-board
Diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the
OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered
not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Transmission
163
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in position P. Turn the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
P
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing
fuel usage while coasting or decelerating. When you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down, the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
Position P
This position locks the transmission and prevents
the front wheels from turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Press the brake pedal.
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear.
To put your vehicle in position P:
• Come to a complete stop.
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in position P.
Position R
With the gearshift lever in position R, the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of position R.
Position N
With the gearshift lever in position N, the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
Position D with overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. The transmission
operates in gears one through six. The automatic transmission shift
strategy has the ability to detect hilly terrain or mountainous areas and
will provide a limited amount of grade assist features automatically.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
164
Transmission
Position S
Moving the gearshift lever to position:
• Provides additional grade (engine) braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This will increase engine RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs (vehicle
acceleration, accelerator pedal, brake pedal and vehicle speed).
• Gears are selected more quickly and at higher engine speeds.
Note: The system will stay in position S until the gear shift lever is
moved into another gear for example position P or position D.
SelectShift Automatic® Transmission
Your SelectShift automatic transmission gives you the ability to manually
change gears if you would like. To use SelectShift, move the gearshift
lever into position S. Now you can use the thumb toggle on the side of
your gearshift lever to select gears.
• Press (+) on the gearshift lever
to manually upshift the
transmission.
• Press (–) on the gearshift lever
to manually downshift the
transmission.
The information display in the instrument cluster will show the selected
gear you are currently in.
In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which
may cause it to stall, SelectShift will automatically make some downshifts
even if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time.
Although the SelectShift will make some downshifts for you, it will still
allow you to downshift at any time as long as the SelectShift determines
that the engine will not be damaged from over-revving.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Transmission
165
Note: Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held
without shifting.
Note: Some models have a blink feature (if equipped). If manually
selecting a gear that is out of the current vehicle speed range, the
vehicle will not make the requested shift and will blink the current gear.
Brake-shift interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking the
vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake
prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the system serviced immediately.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with the ignition
on and the brake pedal pressed:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Using a flat head screwdriver or
similar tool, remove the chrome
bezel at the base of the gearshift
lever.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
166
Transmission
3. Lift the center console upward to
access the base of the gear shifter
assembly and locate the brakeshift
interlock override lever.
4. Press and hold the lever forward
while pulling the gearshift lever out
of the P (Park) position and into
the N (Neutral) position.
5. Reinstall the console and chrome bezel.
6. Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not
operating properly. Refer to the Fuses chapter.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Transmission
167
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
Using the Clutch
Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents
starting the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully pressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the
floor, then put the gearshift lever in
the neutral position.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal and move
the gearshift lever to the desired
gear; position 1 or position R .
5. Release the parking brake, then
slowly release the clutch pedal while
slowly pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the floor.
Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it does not interfere
with the full extension of the clutch pedal.
Note: Failure to fully press the clutch pedal to the floor may cause
increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission components or
damage the transmission.
Note: Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the
clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill.
These actions will reduce the life of the clutch.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
168
Transmission
Recommended Shift Speeds
Note: Do not downshift into position 1 when your vehicle is moving faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h). This may damage the clutch or transmission.
Upshift according to the following charts.
For the 3.7L V6 with 2.73 axle ratio, shift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1-2
15 mph (24 km/h)
2-3
25 mph (40 km/h)
3-4
40 mph (64 km/h)
4-5
45 mph (72 km/h)
5-6
50 mph (80 km/h)
For the 3.7L V6 with 3.31 axle ratio, shift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1-2
13 mph (21 km/h)
2-3
26 mph (42 km/h)
3-4
37 mph (59 km/h)
4-5
43 mph (69 km/h)
5-6
59 mph (95 km/h)
For the 5.0L V8, shift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1-2
12 mph (27 km/h)
2-3
24 mph (40 km/h)
3-4
31 mph (64 km/h)
4-5
39 mph (72 km/h)
5-6
43 mph (80 km/h)
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Transmission
169
Reverse
Note: The gearshift lever can only be moved to position R by pushing
the knob down before shifting to reverse. This is a lockout feature which
protects the transmission from accidentally engaging position R when
intending to select position 1.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into
position R . Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor to disengage clutch.
3. Shift into position R by pushing
the gearshift knob down, then
moving the lever fully to the left,
then forward.
Note: Do not press down on the shifter during any operation other than
shifting to position R, as you may be inhibited from selecting your
desired gear.
If position R is not fully engaged, press the clutch pedal down and return
the gearshift to the neutral position. Release the clutch pedal for a
moment, then press it down and shift to position R again.
Parking Your Vehicle
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the
parking brake fully.
To park your vehicle:
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, hold the clutch pedal down, then shift
into position 1.
3. Turn the ignition off.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
170
Transmission
AXLE INFORMATION
Traction-Lok™ Axle (If Equipped)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok™ axle functions like a standard rear axle.
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a
Traction-Lok™ rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving
and should not be noticeable to the driver.
Axle with TORSEN® Differential (If Equipped)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
axle equipped with a TORSEN® differential functions like a standard
rear axle.
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a
rear axle equipped with a TORSEN® differential could result in a
permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not
affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver.
HILL START ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The hill start assist feature does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave the vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into position P for automatic
transmission or position 1 for manual transmissions.
WARNING: You must remain in the vehicle once you have
activated the hill start assist feature.
WARNING: During all times, you are responsible for controlling
the vehicle, supervising the hill start assist system and
intervening, if required.
WARNING: If the engine is revved excessively, or if a
malfunction is detected when the hill start assist feature is active,
the hill start assist feature will be deactivated.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Transmission
171
This feature makes it easier to pull away when the vehicle is on a slope
without the need to use the parking brake. When this feature is active,
the vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for two to three seconds
after you release the brake pedal. This allows you time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The brakes are released
automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent
the vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when
pulling away on a slope, (for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights
or when reversing uphill into a parking space).
This feature is activated automatically on any slope that can result in
significant vehicle rollback. This feature will not operate if the parking
brake is activated.
Using Hill Start Assist
Note: If the engine is revved excessively, hill start assist will be
deactivated.
1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill.
Keep the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope, the hill start assist
feature will be activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will
remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three
seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the
process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released
automatically.
Disabling and Enabling the Hill Start Assist Feature
Your vehicle comes with hill start assist already enabled. If desired, you
can disable the feature by following the procedure below.
The following procedure must be completed within 45 seconds or the
process will have to be repeated. Begin this procedure with the ignition
turned off. This procedure is for both disabling and enabling the hill start
assist system.
1. Apply the parking brake to make sure the vehicle is not moving.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Place the vehicle in neutral gear.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
172
Transmission
4. Slowly press and release the brake pedal five times – make sure the
brake pedal is completely released each time.
5. Rotate the steering wheel at least one full turn to the right and return
the steering wheel to the original starting position.
6. Rotate the steering wheel at least one full turn to the left and return
the steering wheel to the original starting position.
7. Slowly press and release the brake pedal five times – ensure the brake
pedal is completely released each time.
When the procedure has been completed successfully, the ABS icon in
the instrument cluster will flash:
• three times indicating that the feature has been disabled.
• twice indicating it has been enabled.
Once the feature is programmed as desired, it will remain in that mode
until the above procedure is repeated.
Note: When the AdvanceTrac® system is disabled (see the Traction
Control chapter in your owner’s manual for information on how to do
this), the hill start assist feature is also disabled for the duration that the
AdvanceTrac® system is in that mode. Re-enabling AdvanceTrac® will
also re-enable hill start assist.
Note: If you have used the above procedure to disable the hill start
assist feature, then enabling or disabling AdvanceTrac® will not effect
the hill start assist system.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Brakes
173
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous
grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be
worn-out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If your
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while
braking, it should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal
driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does
not contribute to brake noise. See the Vehicle Care chapter for wheel
cleaning instructions.
See the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the
brake system warning light.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry
the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
If the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady and
firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow your vehicle and reduce engine
power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your
vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to position P and apply
the parking brake, then inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interferences. If none are found and the condition persists, have your
vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Anti-Lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking.
The anti-lock brake system lamp momentarily illuminates when
the ignition is turned on. If the light does not illuminate during
start-up, remains on or flashes, the anti-lock brake system may
be disabled and may need to be serviced.
If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective. If the brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking
brake released, have your brake system serviced immediately.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
174
Brakes
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise
from the system. This is normal.
The ABS will not eliminate the dangers inherent when:
• you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
• your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• you take corners too fast.
• the road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the transmission selector lever is securely latched in position
P (automatic transmission) or position 1 (manual transmission).
To set the parking brake, pull the parking brake handle up as far as
possible.
To release the parking brake:
1. Press and hold the button located at the end of the parking brake
handle.
2. Pull the handle up slightly, then push the handle down.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Traction Control
175
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of
traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual
wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the
wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system
reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations (for example, stuck in snow or mud),
turning the traction control off may be beneficial as this allows
the wheels to spin with full engine power. Turn off the traction
control system by pressing the stability control button located
OFF
on the center console.
System Indicator Lights and Messages
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
AdvanceTrac® system, the stability control light and the stability
control off light will illuminate steadily. Verify that the traction control
system was not manually disabled through the information display. If
the stability control light still illuminates steadily, have the system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle
with AdvanceTrac® disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when the system is in sport mode, the
traction control system is turned off, or AdvanceTrac® is
turned off.
When the traction control system is turned off or on, a message appears
in the information display showing system status.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
176
Stability Control
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel or tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac® system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac®
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac® sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac® system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It is always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac® system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting
in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If
your AdvanceTrac® system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac® system helps you keep control of your vehicle when
on a slippery surface. The electronic stability control portion of the
system helps avoid skids and lateral slides and the traction control
system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. See the
Traction Control chapter for details on traction control system
operation.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Stability Control
177
A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac®
skidding off its intended route.
B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac®
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
USING ADVANCETRAC®
The system automatically is enabled when you start your engine. The
electronic stability control portion of the system is disabled when the
transmission is in position R or, on some models, if the stability control
button is pressed and held for more than five seconds when the brakes
are applied and the vehicle is at a stop. The traction control portion of
the system can be turned off independently. See the Traction Control
chapter.
Button
functions
Default at
start-up
Button pressed
momentarily
AdvanceTrac® Features
Icon
Mode
ESC
status
On during
—
bulb
Enabled
check
Traction
On
Enabled
control off
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
TCS
Enabled
Disabled
178
Button
functions
Button pressed
twice; brakes
applied
Button pressed
and held more
than 5 seconds;
brakes applied;
no throttle
Button pressed
again after
deactivation
Stability Control
AdvanceTrac® Features
Icon
Mode
ESC
status
TCS
Sport mode
(if equipped)
On
Enabled
Enabled
AdvanceTrac®
Disabled
On
Disabled
Disabled
AdvanceTrac®
fully enabled
Off
Enabled
Enabled
Note: Sport mode is not intended to be used on public roadways.
Some models may also come equipped with a sport mode which allows
the driver to reduce normal AdvanceTrac® system intervention and
provide a more spirited driving experience. To enter sport mode, press
the stability control button twice rapidly with the brakes applied. The
message appears in the information display that the system is now in
sport mode.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Parking Aids
179
SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed)
objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this
may include reduced performance or a false activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when
the transmission is in R and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices, such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors (located on the bumper/fascia) free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system’s
accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper/fascia, leaving it
misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range
of the bumper area. The system turns on automatically whenever the
ignition is switched on.
When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume
returns to the previous level.
The system can be turned off using the information display control. See
the Information Display chapter. If a fault is present in the system, a
warning message appears in the information display and does not allow
the driver to switch the faulted system on.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
180
Parking Aids
Using the Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning
increases. When the obstacle is fewer than 12 inches (30 centimeters)
away, the warning sounds continuously. If a stationary or receding object
is detected farther than 12 inches (30 centimeters) from the side of the
vehicle, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects
an object approaching, the warning sounds again.
A. Coverage area of up to 6 feet
(2 meters) from the rear bumper
(with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper).
A
The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R:
• and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h)
or less.
• but not moving, and a moving object is approaching the rear of the
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h).
REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid
supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Parking Aids
181
WARNING: Use caution when using the rear video camera and
the trunk is ajar. If the trunk is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines (if
enabled) have been removed when the trunk is ajar.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off
while the transmission is in R. Make sure the vehicle is not
moving.
The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind
the vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your
vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.
The camera is located on the trunk.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when
you place the transmission in R. The system uses fixed guidelines which
show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while reversing in a
straight line. This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or
aligning the vehicle with another object behind the vehicle.
Note: Do not use the camera system if the trunk is ajar.
Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R, have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees what is being towed behind
the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually
provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow
connector is engaged.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
182
Parking Aids
Note: The camera may not operate correctly under the following
conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating.
• The camera’s view is obstructed by mud, water or debris. Clean the lens
with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Guidelines
Note: The guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R.
A. Rear bumper
B. Fixed guideline: Red zone
D
C. Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
C
D. Fixed guideline: Green zone
B
A
The fixed guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel
position.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to
the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror
to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle.
Rear Camera Delay
On vehicles without a navigation system, the camera image in the
rear view mirror remains on for a few seconds to assist in parking or
attaching a trailer.
On vehicles with a navigation system, the camera image remains in
the display until the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h). This occurs
when the rear camera delay feature is on, or until a radio button is
selected. Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default
setting for the rear camera delay is OFF.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Cruise Control
183
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot
on the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNING: Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Note: Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up or down a
steep hill. Apply the brakes if the vehicle speed increases above the set
speed while driving downhill.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the vehicle speed decreases more
than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill.
The cruise controls are located on
the steering wheel.
CNCL ON
RSM OFF
-
SET +
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
The indicator will appear in the instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator will change colors in the instrument cluster.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
184
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed
will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, you will return
to the speed that you previously set.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release the control when you reach
the desired speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The set speed will change in
approximately 1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed. Press and release SET+.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. You will not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RSM.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Driving Aids
185
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper
operation. When a system error is detected a steering message will
appear in the information display.
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper
operation of the electronic system. When an electronic error is
detected, a message will be displayed in the information display. If this
happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine. After
at least 10 seconds, reset the system by restarting the engine, and
watch the information display for a steering message. If a steering
message returns, or returns while driving, take the vehicle to your
dealer to have it checked.
WARNING: Obtain immediate service if a system error is
detected. You may not notice any difference in the feel of your
steering, but a serious condition may exist. Failure to do so may result
in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power-assisted steering system.
There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the
ignition is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort. Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes
for you to steer. This occurs to prevent internal overheating and
permanent damage to your steering system. If this should occur, you will
neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause
permanent damage. Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the
system to cool and steering assist will return to normal.
When a steering system error is detected, steering messages may appear
in the information display.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
186
Driving Aids
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
Selectable Steering
Note: The steering setting defaults to standard if the battery is
disconnected or removed.
See the Information Displays chapter.
You can select the desired steering feel using the information display
control. The settings are:
• Standard: Default factory setting.
• Sport: Slightly higher effort required for steering with more road force
felt through the steering wheel.
• Comfort: Slightly less effort required for steering with less road force
felt through the steering wheel.
After selecting the desired setting, you may feel a soft feedback bump in
the steering wheel when the changeover occurs.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Load Carrying
187
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading – With and Without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
188
Load Carrying
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control
and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Load Carrying
189
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position.
The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
190
Load Carrying
• Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Load Carrying
191
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
192
Load Carrying
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to
carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends
average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh approximately
30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 - (5 x 220) - (5
x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have enough load
capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x
13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Load Carrying
193
• Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from
the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been
planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with
the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags
of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement
to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the
calculation would be: 1,400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry
that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kg. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove
3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
194
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Note: For information on electrical items such as fuses or relays, see the
Fuses chapter.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during, and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement affects the vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items so they are centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight.
• Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward the vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or
shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. Additional
information regarding proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up
for towing is noted under Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter and
in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide, available at your authorized dealer.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Towing
195
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Note: Do not tow with the Boss 302, Boss 302 Laguna Seca, GT Deluxe
or Shelby GT500 models; they are not rated to tow a trailer.
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration
listed in the chart below.
Note: Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area. Do not
exceed:
• 12 feet2 (1.11 meters2) trailer frontal area.
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1000 feet (300 meters) starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter)
elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a
specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this
specified weight, as the vehicle’s electrical system may not include the
wiring connector needed to activate electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a Class I trailer provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your
vehicle configuration on the following chart.
Powertrain
3.7L TiVCT
5.0L TiVCT
Maximum Trailer Weight - lb (kg)
1000 (454)
1000 (454)
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your
scheduled maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency
gives you.
For load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety
Compliance label and for instructions on calculating your vehicle’s load,
refer to Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter.
Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of the vehicle
load when calculating the total vehicle weight.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
196
Towing
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the
axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the total trailer weight is on the
tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at
the GVWR not GCWR.
Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control
of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds
(680 kilograms) when loaded.
Trailer Lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions
and equipment for hooking up the lamps.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Towing
197
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place
the gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and
to help A/C performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The
speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on
long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not apply
the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature,
use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps
eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached; anticipate stops
and brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point the vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set the vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in position P or manual transmission in
a high gear.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
equipped with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into
the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed
from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 centimeters)
above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
198
Towing
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle has been
submerged in water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle
lubricant, which is not normally checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. If the vehicle is
towed incorrectly, or by any other means, vehicle damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the front using wheel lift equipment,
the rear wheels (drive wheels) must be placed on a dolly to prevent
damage to the transmission.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Towing
199
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is recommended that the front wheels be placed on a dolly to prevent
damage to the front fascia.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
In the event your vehicle becomes disabled (without access to wheel
dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain/transmission configuration) under the following conditions:
• The vehicle is facing forward so that it is towed in a forward
direction.
• The transmission is placed in position N. See Automatic
transmission in the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the
transmission into N.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. See the Climate
Control chapter.
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or
transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle
with all four (4) wheels off the ground, such as when using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
200
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
OPENING THE CONVERTIBLE TOP
Note: Do not store articles behind rear seat. Articles stored in the
convertible top stowage compartment may break the rear glass window
when the top is opened.
Note: Opening the convertible top when the top material is wet may
cause mold or mildew.
The convertible top can be opened with the side windows down. The
windows will automatically lower when opening or closing the top.
The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle is stationary or
traveling under 3 mph (5 km/h).
To open the convertible top:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. The ignition must be on. It is
recommended that the engine is running when opening the top to
prevent draining the battery.
2. Check the convertible top stowage compartment behind the rear seat
to be sure it is empty. Make sure the convertible top outer surface is free
of debris.
Note: The latch handles must be
pulled downward fully to allow the
latch to fully rotate into the open
position.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
201
3. Unclamp the top from the windshield header by pulling each latch
handle down and then rotating the latch to the rear until it clears the
header.
Note: If the top has not been opened for some time and sticks to the
windshield header, push the front of the top up slightly with your hand
to loosen it.
4. Press and hold the convertible
top switch on the overhead console
until the windows are completely
down and the top is completely
stored.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
202
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
USING THE BOOT
Installing the Boot
WARNING: Always secure the retaining clips and boot straps on
the vehicle or the boot may come loose while driving.
Note: Be sure the boot is secure on the vehicle before driving. Improper
installation can result in loss or damage of the boot.
1. Install the boot on the vehicle by hooking the boot retaining clips on
the back panel.
2. Install the boot on the right side tucking in the front part of the boot
in the quarter panel and hooking the retaining clip on the side.
3. Install the boot on the left side tucking in the front part of the boot in
the quarter panel and hooking the retaining clip on the side.
4. Tuck the boot corners behind the shoulder belts.
5. Secure the boot straps on the rear seat hooks behind the rear seat.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
203
Removing the Boot
1. Unhook the boot straps from the rear seat hooks.
2. Push the boot down unhooking the boot retaining clips.
3. Lift the boot off the vehicle.
Storing the Boot
1. Position the boot right-side up
and fold each side of the boot
inward.
2. Turn the boot upside down and
fold the left side of the boot inward.
3. Fold the right side inward and
secure the boot with the strap.
Stow the boot in the trunk.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
204
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
CLOSING THE CONVERTIBLE TOP
Note: The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle is
stationary or traveling under 3 mph (5 kmh).
Note: Make sure that the latch handles are pulled down and in the fully
opened position before the top makes contact with the windshield
header. This allows for hand clearance and proper closure of the top.
To close the convertible top:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. The ignition must be on. It is
recommended that the engine is running when opening the top to
prevent draining the battery.
2. Press and hold the convertible
top switch until the windows lower
completely and the top unfolds and
moves forward toward the
windshield header.
Make sure the latch handles are
pulled down and in the fully opened
position before the top and the
windshield header make contact.
3. Continue pressing the convertible top switch to close the top
completely. The top must be flush with the header.
4. Pull down on the drivers latch
handle and rotate it all the way
forward into the windshield header.
5. Press the latch handle up into
the stowed position to secure the
latch.
6. Pull down on the passengers side
latch handle and rotate it all the
way forward into the windshield
header.
7. Press the latch handle up into the stowed position to secure the latch.
Note: If the top has been open for an extended period of time or if the
temperature is low, the top material may shrink slightly. If this happens,
pull on the latch handles or the center grip to fasten to top
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Driving Hints
205
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 mi (480 km).
During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unique driving
characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 mi (1600 km).
Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early. Do
not labor the engine. Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600 km).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel
economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may not want to do because they may
reduce your fuel economy:
• Sudden or hard accelerations.
• Rev the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
206
Driving Hints
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for
every 400 pounds [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
• Add particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g.; bug deflectors,
rollbars or light bars, running boards, ski racks).
• Drive with the wheels out of alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Drive through water in an emergency only, and not
as part of normal driving.
WARNING: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air
filter.
Note: Driving through deep water may allow water into the transmission
or air intake and can cause internal vehicle damage or cause it to stall.
Note: Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the
wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom
of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water,
traction or brake capability may be
limited. Also, water may enter your
engine’s air intake and severely
damage your engine or your vehicle
may stall.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle
as quickly as dry brakes.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Driving Hints
207
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle.
Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to
ensure mats do not shift out of position.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle footwell
that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and
interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already
installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of the
vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other
covering. Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the
pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
• Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning
or replacement.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell
while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become
trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
208
Driving Hints
WARNING (Continued)
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation
causing loss of control of vehicle.
• To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over
the retention post and press down to lock in.
• To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
209
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the U.S. : Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24-hours a day, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your owner’s manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit).
• battery jump start.
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility).
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters)
of gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9 liters) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Fuel delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 kilometers) of the disablement location or
to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to
an authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 kilometers) from the
disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 miles (56 kilometers).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the U.S. : Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the owner’s manual
portfolio in the glove compartment.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
210
Roadside Emergencies
U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 kilometers). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers
will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada : Getting Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–665–2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada : Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the card is found in the warranty
information in the glove box.
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. Please see your warranty information or visit our website at
www.ford.ca for information on Canadian services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The hazard flasher control is located on the center console
next to the gearshift lever. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash.
• Press the flasher control again to turn them off.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by
an authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
211
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your
vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition off and wait approximately 10 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the fuel pump.
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed
to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to
push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may exhibit a combination of firm and soft shifts. This
operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability
of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully
update transmission operation.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
1. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
2. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
212
Roadside Emergencies
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
1
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
3
4
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
2
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor or fuel injection
system.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
213
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at a
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
4
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
1
the positive (+) terminal of the
2
disabled vehicle’s battery.
3
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
214
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training,
equipment or both, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the
warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing Address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.fordowner.com.
These are some of the items that can be found online:
• U.S. Dealer Locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
215
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
In order to help serve you better, please have the following information
available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
216
Customer Assistance
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18000 mi (29 000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resorting to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
217
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services
You Need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting
before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within 40 days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound
by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where
all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in
the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE
decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the
decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
218
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION or ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
This pertains to vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In
those cases, where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle
service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in
an impartial third party mediation or arbitration program administered by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford
of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the United States.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
219
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern
Mariana Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin
Islands, please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673).
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford International Business Development Inc.
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1937
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number for Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
220
Customer Assistance
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help
you, they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
A French owner’s manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
221
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
222
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the
specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.
If electrical components in the vehicle
are not working, a fuse may have
blown. Blown fuses are identified by a
broken wire within the fuse. Check
the appropriate fuses before replacing
any electrical components.
15
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
Natural
Natural
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black
Fuses
223
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, see Changing the
Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse or relay
number
1
Fuse amp
rating
80A*
2
—
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Protected components
Passenger compartment fuse
panel
Not used
224
Fuses
Fuse or relay
number
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Fuse amp
rating
—
30A*
20A*
40A*
40A*
40A*
30A*
30A*
—
20A*
13
14
15
20A**
25A**
20A**
10A**
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
20A**
10A**
20A*
30A*
30A*
30A*
20A*
10A**
24
25
26
10A**
10A**
20A**
27
20A**
28
—
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Protected components
Not used
Blower motor relay
Power point (body)
Rear defroster relay
Cooling fan relay
Anti-lock brake system pump
Wipers
Anti-lock brake system valve
Not used
Differential fluid pump (Shelby
only)
Fuel pump relay (non-Shelby)
Fuel pump relay (Shelby only)
Fuel pump relay #2 (Shelby only)
Intercooler pump relay (Shelby
only)
Heated seats
Alternator sense
Auxiliary body module
Starter relay
Rear amplifier (Shaker Pro radio)
Powertrain relay
Power point (instrument panel)
Powertrain control module
keep-alive power
Brake on/off power
A/C compressor relay
Left high intensity discharge
headlamp relay
Right high intensity discharge
headlamp relay
Not used
Fuses
Fuse or relay
number
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Fuse amp
rating
30A*
—
30A*
30A*
30A*
30A*
40A*
Diode
—
15A**
5A**
15A**
41
42
G8VA relay
G8VA relay
43
44
45
G8VA relay
G8VA relay
5A**
46
5A**
47
15A**
48
15A**
49
15A**
50
51
Full ISO relay
Full ISO relay
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
225
Protected components
Passenger front window
Not used
Passenger power seat
Driver power seat
Front amplifier (Shaker radio)
Driver front window motor
Convertible top motor
Fuel diode
Not used
Fuel injectors (Shelby only)
Heated mirrors
Powertrain control module vehicle
power 4 – ignition coil
Fuel pump relay
Intercooler pump relay (Shelby
only)
A/C compressor relay
Fuel pump relay #2 (Shelby only)
Powertrain control module
run/start
Powertrain control module vehicle
power 3 – general powertrain
components
Powertrain control module vehicle
power 1
Powertrain control module vehicle
power 5
Powertrain control module vehicle
power 2 – emissions related
powertrain components
Cooling fan relay (high)
Blower motor relay
226
Fuse or relay
number
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Fuses
Fuse amp
rating
Full ISO relay
Full ISO relay
Full ISO relay
Full ISO relay
—
Full ISO relay
High current
relay
* Cartridge Fuses ** Mini Fuses
Protected components
Starter relay
Rear defroster relay
Front wiper relay
Cooling fan relay (low)
Not used
Powertrain control module relay
Differential fluid pump (Shelby
only)
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located in the lower passenger side area behind the
kick panel. Open the trim panel door and remove the fuse cover to
access the fuses.
Use the provided fuse puller tool to remove a fuse. It is located inside
the fuse cover.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Fuses
227
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse or relay
number
1
Fuse amp
rating
30A
2
3
4
15A
15A
30A
5
6
7
8
9
10
10A
20A
10A
10A
15A
15A
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Protected components
Driver rear window (convertible
only)
Not used (spare)
SYNC
Passenger rear window
(convertible only)
Brake transmission shift interlock
Turn signals, Hazard flashers
Left low beam headlamp
Right low beam headlamp
Courtesy lamps
Switch illumination, Pony
projection lights
228
Fuses
Fuse or relay
number
11
12
13
14
Fuse amp
rating
10A
7.5A
5A
10A
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10A
15A
20A
20A
25A
15A
15A
15A
15A
20A
10A
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
10A
20A
5A
5A
5A
10A
10A
33
34
35
36
37
10A
5A
10A
5A
10A
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Protected components
Security module
Power mirrors
Not used (spare)
Center information display,
Electronic finish panel, Global
position system
Climate control
Not used (spare)
Power door locks, Trunk release
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Diagnostic connector
Fog lamps
Park lamps, License lamps
High beam headlamps
Horn
Demand lighting (battery saver),
Visor vanity lamps
Cluster (battery)
Ignition switch feed
Audio mute (start)
Camera (run/start)
Temperature sensor motor
Restraints control module
Reverse parking aid (non-Shelby),
Vehicle dynamics control module
(Shelby only)
Not used (spare)
Electronic stability control
Auxiliary body module run/start
Anti-theft system
Rear defroster relay coil
Fuses
Fuse or relay
number
38
39
40
41
Fuse amp
rating
20A
20A
20A
15A
42
43
44
45
10A
10A
10A
5A
46
7.5A
47
30A Circuit
Breaker
Relay
48
229
Protected components
Not used (spare)
Radio/Navigation
Not used (spare)
Accessory delay (windows,
automatic dimming rear view
mirror [including microphone and
compass] and door switch III)
Not used (spare)
Heated seat relay coils
Not used (spare)
Wiper relay and module, Blower
relay
Passenger airbag deactivation
indicator, Occupant classification
sensor
Not used (spare)
Accessory delay relay (windows,
automatic dimming rear view
mirror [including microphone and
compass] and door switch III)
Auxiliary Relay with Heated Seats (If Equipped)
Vehicles equipped with heated seats have a relay box located under the
driver seat. This box contains two relays for the driver and passenger
heated seats.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
230
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness
and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers
that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We
believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your
vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide Scheduled Maintenance
Information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty
information to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage or personal
burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to position P.
2. Block the wheels.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
231
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located on the driver’s side kick panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
232
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
3.7L V6 Engine
B
A
H
G
F
A. Battery
B. Engine oil dipstick
C. Engine oil filler cap
D. Brake fluid reservoir
E. Air filter assembly
F. Engine coolant reservoir
G. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
H. Power distribution box
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
C
D
E
Maintenance
5.0L V8 Engine
A. Battery
B. Engine oil filler cap
C. Engine oil dipstick
D. Brake fluid reservoir
E. Air filter assembly
F. Engine coolant reservoir
G. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
H. Power distribution box
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
233
234
Maintenance
Engine Shield
Some vehicles may be equipped with an aero-shield under the engine.
Remove the front fasteners of the shield to gain access for service. This
includes oil and filter changes.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A
B
A. MIN
B. MAX
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the engine.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace
the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil immediately.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running.
Note: Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above
the MAX mark may cause engine damage.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
235
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the
American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this
trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers.
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications for more information.
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information.
Note: Make sure that the level is at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the
COLD FILL RANGE.
If the level is below the COLD FILL RANGE, add coolant immediately.
See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300ROB75240 available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
236
Maintenance
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark of
the COLD FILL RANGE.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants or
additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and or heating
systems. This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s
warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the engine coolant may change
color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the engine coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine
coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be
drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make
sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may harm
engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added , in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with Motorcraft®
Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with prediluted engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can
cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can
cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
237
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the
cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. See the
technical specifications chart in theCapacities and Specifications
chapter.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point
protection. Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant
and may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat
protection. Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion and freeze protection characteristics of the
engine coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use
prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
238
Maintenance
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load and
terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot) area.
• The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.
• The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode is Activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
239
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot. The hot coolant is under pressure and
may cause serious burns.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases
the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
Checking Automatic Transmission Fluid
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked and, if required, added by
an authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
See your Scheduled Maintenance Information for scheduled intervals
for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly) or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
240
Maintenance
Checking and Adding Manual Transmission Fluid (if equipped)
1. Clean the filler plug. It is located
on the passenger side of the
transmission.
2. Remove the filler plug and inspect
the fluid level.
3. For vehicles equipped with a V6 engine, the correct manual
transmission fill level is at the lower edge of the filler hole. For vehicles
equipped with a V8 engine, the correct manual transmission fill level is
1/2 in (1.3 cm) below the edge of the filler hole.
4. Add enough fluid through the filler opening to bring the fluid up to
the recommended levels.
5. Install and tighten the fill plug securely.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. See the technical
specifications chart in the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID CHECK
Brake and clutch (if equipped) systems are supplied from the same
reservoir.
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering (EPS) system.
There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
For Shelby fuel filter requirements, see the Shelby GT500 Supplement.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
241
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid
that meets Ford specifications. See the technical specifications chart in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
242
Maintenance
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional water during its life of
service.
Note: If your battery has a cover or a shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
Battery Relearn
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in position P (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 mi (16 km) or more to relearn
the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
243
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the transmission
must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the transmission may
shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and will not affect function
or durability of the transmission. Over time the adaptive learning process will
fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner. Follow
your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your local authorized
recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade
to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
2. Squeeze the locking tabs to release
the blade from the arm and pull the
blade away from the arm to remove it.
3. Attach the new blade to the arm
and snap it into place.
Replace wiper blades at least once per
year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
To prolong the life of the wiper
blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield
before turning on the wipers. The layer of ice has many sharp edges and
can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
244
Maintenance
AIR FILTER CHECK
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. See Motorcraft® Part Numbers in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter.
See Scheduled Maintenance Information for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
V6 engine
V8 engine
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
245
3. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
4. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
5. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps. Be sure
that the air cleaner cover tabs are engaged into the slots of the air
cleaner housing.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
• (1) 8 ft (2.4 m)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 ft (7.6 m)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp to the
ground and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m)
horizontal reference line on the
vertical wall or screen at this height
(a piece of masking tape works well). The center of the lamp is marked
by a 3 millimeter circle on the headlamp lens.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, block the
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
246
Maintenance
On the wall or screen, you will
observe a flat zone of high intensity
light located at the top of the right
hand portion of the beam pattern. If
the top edge of the high intensity
light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, the headlamp will
need to be adjusted.
4. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp.
5. Then use a 7 mm Allen wrench or a Phillips screwdriver to adjust the
vertical aim of the headlamp. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED
FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
These are examples of acceptable condensation:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
247
These are examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp
water leak):
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs
The headlamps on your vehicle use a high intensity discharge source.
These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned out, the
bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized
dealer.
Replacing Front Parking Lamp/Turn Signal Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the
hood.
2. Remove the hex head screws attaching the beauty shield at the top,
forward edge of the engine compartment just aft of the headlamps.
3. Remove the beauty shield to gain access to the front parking lamp and
turn signal assembly.
4. Rotate the socket
counterclockwise and remove from
the lamp assembly.
5. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of socket.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
248
Maintenance
Replacing Front Sidemarker Bulb
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Remove the hex head screws
attaching the underbody forward
aeroshield.
3. Remove the underbody forward
aeroshield to gain access to the
front sidemarker assembly.
4. Rotate the socket counterclockwise and remove from the lamp
assembly.
5. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of socket.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
249
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (V6) (if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the
hood.
2. Remove the hex head screws
attaching the underbody forward
aeroshield.
3. Remove the underbody forward
aeroshield to gain access to the fog
lamp assembly.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb by pulling
it straight off.
5. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove from the lamp assembly.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (GT)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamp bulbs. It is designed to last
the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you see your authorized dealer.
Replacing Tail Tamp/Brake/Rear Turn Signal Lamps
Your vehicle is equipped with LED tail lamp, brake and rear turn signal
lamps. It is designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is
required, it is recommended that you see your authorized dealer.
Replacing Backup Bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with LED backup lamps. They are designed to
last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, it is recommended
that you see your authorized dealer.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
250
Maintenance
Replacing Rear Sidemarker Lamp Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position and locate the
sidemarker on the rear bumper fascia.
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver between the rear of the sidemarker lens
and the bumper fascia.
3. Push the screwdriver to the front of the vehicle and then slide it
towards you to pop out the lamp assembly.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of socket.
Install the new bulb in reverse
order.
Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the lens
from the license plate lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight out
from the lamp assembly.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse
order.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
251
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized D.O.T. for North America and an E
for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and
safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or
void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Function
* HID (high intensity discharge) headlamp
Front park/turn lamp
Sidemarker (front/rear)
Trade Number
D3S
7444NA (amber)
194
LED (GT)
Fog lamp
H11 (V6)
* Tail lamp, brake lamp, turn lamp (LED)
LED
* High-mount stoplamp (LED)
LED
* Backup lamp
LED
License plate lamp
C5WL
Dome/Map lamp
168
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
252
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent
quality:
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft® Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Care
253
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.
• Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash
off as soon as possible.
• Remove any exterior accessories before entering a car wash.
Exterior Chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as
they can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
• Use Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Apply the product as you
would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner
to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave
cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding
that which is recommended.
• Note: Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe
and permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.
Convertible Top and Padded Molding
For vinyl tops, wash with Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
For cloth tops, wash with a high quality convertible top cleaner and
protectant.
• Do not use stiff bristle brushes or abrasive materials or cleaners.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
254
Vehicle Care
• Hot waxes applied by commercial car washes can affect the
cleanability of vinyl material.
• Using high water pressure or wand-type car washes against the
convertible top and windows may cause water leaks and possible seal
damage.
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will grey or stain the parts over time.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles, such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout, before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that
require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft®
Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to
prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Care
255
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers
do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper
blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by
commercial car washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other
organic contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or
chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and smearing of the
windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or
Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada. Be sure to replace
wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft® Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
256
Vehicle Care
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp, white,
cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry, white, cotton cloth to dry these
areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact
with certain products, such as insect repellent and suntan lotion, in
order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white, cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Care
257
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner. Dry the area with
a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics or petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Heavy dirt
and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge.
Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or
cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
258
Vehicle Care
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), read the following maintenance recommendations to
make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax
to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed.
• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges, and latches with a light
grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contains contaminates that may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Care
259
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more),
fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality gas stabilizer
product to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage
periods exceed 30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label.
The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the
additive throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (8 m) every 15 days to lubricate working
parts and prevent corrosion.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
260
Vehicle Care
Removing Vehicle from Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters)
back and forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
261
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 11⁄2
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
262
Wheels and Tires
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
263
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been
stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to
the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
264
Wheels and Tires
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
C D
B
E
F
G
H
A
I
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
J
M
L
K
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for service on cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter, this may mean it is
designated by either ETRTO (European Tire and Rim Technical
Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
265
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
266
Wheels and Tires
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
267
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturers’
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings, such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type
Tires
LT type tires have some additional
B
information beyond those of P type
C
tires. These differences are
A
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
D
inflation limits.
B
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
268
Wheels and Tires
Information on T Type Tires
B
A
C
D
E
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires. These differences are
described below.
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars,
sport-utility vehicles, minivans and
light trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. See the payload description and graphic in the Load
Carrying chapter.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
269
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat build-up and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and
not appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s maximum
permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be
carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
270
Wheels and Tires
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot (for
example, driven more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at
or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type mini-spare tires, see the Dissimilar Spare Tire
and Wheel Assembly Information section. Store and maintain at 60 psi
(4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see the Dissimilar
Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information section. Store and
maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown
on the Tire Label.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
271
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 millimeters),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread is
worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2
millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars,
the tire is worn out and must be replaced.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
272
Wheels and Tires
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected,
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (such as load, speed,
inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
273
Tire Replacement Requirements
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit
failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the
tire wheel assembly.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
274
Wheels and Tires
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, the system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your
tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may
be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits.
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road.
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
275
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels may
be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear, ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and
wheel assembly. A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as
a spare tire and wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from
the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel
assembly, it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used
in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information) will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
• Rear-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires at left of diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
276
Wheels and Tires
SUMMER TIRES (IF EQUIPPED)
Summer tires provide superior performance on wet and dry roads.
Summer tires do not have the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction
rating on the tire side wall. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as All-season or Snow tires, Ford does not
recommend using summer tires when temperatures drop to
approximately 40°F (5°C) or below (depending on tire wear and
environmental conditions) or in snow and ice conditions. Like any tire,
summer tire performance is affected by tire wear and environmental
conditions. If you must drive in those conditions, Ford recommends
using Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or Snow tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for
extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components.
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle may have all-weather treads to provide traction
in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the
law requires them.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Chains may damage aluminum wheels.
• Use only SAE Class S chains with P225/60R17 tires on the rear of the
vehicle only.
• Do not use tire chains with any other size tires. Use of SAE Class S
chains or other chain types on tires other than a P225/60R17 will
damage the vehicle.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
277
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is not a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge.
See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. When the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the system low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The system malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
278
Wheels and Tires
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. System
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the system from functioning properly. Always check the system
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the system to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Note: Each road tire is equipped
with a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire and wheel assembly
cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the
tire and is not visible unless the tire
is removed. Take care when
changing the tire to avoid damaging
the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate
tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
279
When Your Temporary Spare Tire Is Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that
the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put
back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have
the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on
your vehicle. For additional information, see Changing Tires with a
Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this section.
When You Believe Your System Is Not Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for
information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Solid warning
light
Possible cause Customer action required
Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Make sure tires are at the proper
pressure. See Inflating Your Tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located
on the edge of driver’s door or the
B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system function. For a
description on how the system
functions, see When Your Temporary
Spare Tire is Installed in this section.
TPMS
If the tires are properly inflated and
malfunction
the spare tire is not in use but the
light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
280
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Flashing
warning light
Wheels and Tires
Possible cause Customer action required
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system function. For a
description on how the system
functions, see When Your Temporary
Spare Tire is Installed in this section.
TPMS
If the tires are properly inflated and
malfunction
the spare tire is not in use but the
light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each
pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger
tire inflation pressure may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from
a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature,
the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop
of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value may
be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light
is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check the air pressure in the road
tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the
nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires
to the recommended inflation pressure.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
281
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire
pressure monitoring system and should not be used. However, if
you must use a sealant, the tire pressure monitoring system sensor and
valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
WARNING: See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this
chapter for important information. If the tire pressure monitor
sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate
when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the
monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System earlier in
the chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, then it is intended
for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel assembly that is
the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally
provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it
should be replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or
wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires
and wheels and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire
size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
282
Wheels and Tires
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label.
• tow a trailer.
• use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire.
• use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time.
• use commercial car washing equipment.
• try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
do not:
• exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time.
• use commercial car washing equipment.
• use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire and wheel.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead
to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
283
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
additional caution should be given to:
• towing a trailer.
• driving vehicles equipped with a camper body.
• driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel,
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission selector lever is in
position P or N.
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure to place the transmission selector lever in
position P or N, set the parking brake and block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported
only by a jack. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone
else could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
284
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment
with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided as
original equipment with your vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or
modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard
flashers.
2. Place the transmission selector lever in position P or N and turn the
engine off.
3. Block both the front and rear of
the wheel diagonally opposite the flat
tire. For example, if the left front tire
is flat, block the right rear wheel.
4. Remove the lug wrench, spare
tire and jack.
5. Remove the center ornament
from the wheel. Loosen each wheel
lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off
the ground.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
285
6. The vehicle jacking points are
shown here, and can be identified
by the triangle markings on the
vehicle. Details are depicted on the
yellow warning label on the jack.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.
7. Put the jack in the jack notch
next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the
ground.
8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
9. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward. Reinstall lug
nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug
nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
If you are using the temporary tire, the lug nut washers will not appear
to be flush with the rim. This is normal only when using the temporary
spare tire.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See Wheel Lug
Nut Torque Specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
12. Put flat tire, wheel ornament, jack and
lug wrench away. Make sure the jack is
fastened so it does not rattle when you
drive.
13. Unblock the wheel.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
286
Wheels and Tires
TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The temporary mobility kit sealant compound in the canister is to
be used for one tire only. See your Ford authorized dealer for additional
replacement sealant canisters.
The kit is located in the spare tire well in the trunk. The kit consists of
an air compressor to reinflate the tire and a sealing compound in a
canister that will effectively seal most punctures caused by nails or
similar objects. This kit will provide a temporary seal allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 120 miles (200 kilometers) at a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
A. Air compressor (inside)
B C D
B. Diverter knob
C. On/Off button
E
A
D. Air pressure gauge
F E. Sealant bottle/canister
L
F. Sealant filling clear tube
G. Sealant tube – tire valve
K
connector
J
H. Yellow cap tool
I. Air compressor hose
G
H
I
J. Air hose – tire valve connector
K. Accessory power plug
L. Casing/housing
General Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Note: Do not use the temporary mobility kit if a tire has become
severely damaged by driving the vehicle with a tire that has insufficient
air pressure. Only punctured areas located within the tire tread can be
sealed with the temporary mobility kit.
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger than 1⁄4 inch (6.4 millimeters)
or damage to the tire’s sidewall. The tire may not completely seal.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
287
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire performance. For this reason:
• Note: Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Note: Do not drive further than 120 miles (200 kilometers). Drive
only to the closest Ford Motor Company authorized dealer or tire
repair shop to have your tire inspected.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.
• Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure in the affected tire; if the
tire is losing pressure, have the vehicle towed.
• Read the information in the Tips for Use of the Temporary Mobility
Kit section to ensure safe operation of the temporary mobility kit and
your vehicle.
Tips for Use of the Temporary Mobility Kit
Read the following list of tips to ensure safe operation of the temporary
mobility kit:
• Before operating the temporary mobility kit, make sure your vehicle is
safely off the road and away from moving traffic. Turn on the hazard
lights.
• Always set the parking brake to ensure the vehicle does not move
unexpectedly.
• Do not remove any foreign objects, such as nails or screws, from the tire.
• When using the temporary mobility kit, leave the engine running (only
if the vehicle is outdoors or in a well-ventilated area) so the
compressor does not drain the vehicle’s battery.
• Do not allow the compressor to operate continuously for more than
15 minutes; this will help prevent the compressor from overheating.
• Never leave the temporary mobility kit unattended when it is operating.
• Sealant compound contains latex. Make sure that you use the
non-latex gloves provided to avoid an allergic reaction.
• Keep the temporary mobility kit away from children.
• Only use the temporary mobility kit when the ambient temperature is
between -22°F (–30°C) and 158°F (70°C).
• Only use the sealing compound before the use by date. The use by
date is on the lower right hand corner of the label located on the
sealant canister (bottle). Note: Check the use by date regularly and
replace the canister after four years.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
288
Wheels and Tires
• Do not store the temporary mobility kit unsecured inside the
passenger compartment of the vehicle as it may cause injury during a
sudden stop or collision. Always store the kit in its original location.
• After sealant use, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
• When inflating a tire or other objects, use the black air hose only. Do not
use the transparent hose which is designed for sealant application only.
• Operating the temporary mobility kit could cause an electrical
disturbance in radio, CD, and DVD player operation (if equipped). .
What to Do When a Tire Is Punctured
A tire puncture within the tire’s tread area can be repaired in two stages
with the temporary mobility kit:
• In the first stage, the tire will be reinflated with a sealing compound
and air. After the tire has been reinflated, you will need to drive the
vehicle a short distance (approximately 4 miles [6 kilometers]) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
• In the second stage, you will need to check the tire pressure and
adjust, if necessary, to the vehicle’s tire inflation pressure.
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing Compound and Air
WARNING: Do not stand directly over the temporary mobility
kit while inflating the tire. If you notice any unusual bulges or
deformations in the tire’s sidewall during inflation, stop and call
roadside assistance.
WARNING: If the tire does not inflate to the recommended tire
pressure within 15 minutes, stop and call roadside assistance.
Preparation
Park the vehicle in a safe, level and secure area, away from moving
traffic. Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking brake and turn the
engine off. Inspect the flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. To avoid any allergic reactions, use the
non-latex gloves located in the accessory box on the underside of the
temporary mobility kit housing.
Do not remove any foreign object that has pierced the tire. If a puncture
is located in the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside assistance.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
289
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unwrap the clear tube from the compressor housing.
3. Remove the tube cap and fasten the metal connector of the tube to the
tire valve, turning clockwise. Make sure the connection is tightly fastened.
4. Plug the power cable into the
12-volt power point in the vehicle.
5. Remove the warning sticker found on the canister and place it on the
top of the instrument panel or the center of the dash.
6. Note: Start the engine only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a
well-ventilated area.
7. Push and turn dial (A)
counterclockwise to the sealant
B
position. Turn on the kit by pressing
the on button (B).
A
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure
listed on the Tire Label located on
the driver’s door or the door jamb
area.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
290
Wheels and Tires
Note: When the sealing compound is first added into the tire, the air
pressure gauge reading on the compressor unit may indicate a higher
value; this is normal and should be no reason for concern. The pressure
will drop after about 30 seconds of operation. The tire pressure has to be
checked with the compressor in the OFF position to get the correct tire
pressure reading.
9. When the recommended tire pressure is reached, turn off the kit by
pressing the on and off button; disconnect the kit from the tire valve and
the power point. Re-install the valve cap on the tire valve, place the tube
cap on the metal connector, and return the kit to the stowage area.
10. Note: Immediately and cautiously, drive the vehicle 4 miles
(6 kilometers) to distribute the sealant evenly inside the tire. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Note: If you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise while driving, reduce your speed until you can safely pull off to
the side of the road to call for roadside assistance. Note: Do not
proceed to the second stage of this operation.
11. After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and check the tire pressure. See
Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure.
Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure
WARNING: If you are proceeding from the First Stage:
Reinflating the Tire with Sealing Compound and Air section
and have injected sealant in the tire and the pressure is below 20 psi
(1.4 bar), stop and call roadside assistance. If tire pressure is above
20 psi (1.4 bar), continue to the next step.
WARNING: The power plug may get hot after use and should be
handled carefully while unplugging.
Check the air pressure of your tires as follows:
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unhook the black hose from the side of the compressor and fasten
firmly on the valve stem by turning clockwise.
3. Press down and turn the dial clockwise to the air position. Turn on the
kit by pressing the on/off button.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
PSI
BAR
291
4. Adjust the tire to the
recommended inflation pressure
from the Tire Label located on the
driver’s door or door jamb area.
Note: The tire pressure has to be
checked with the compressor in the
OFF position to get the correct tire
pressure reading.
5. Turn the compressor off by
pressing the on/off button.
6. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve cap on the tire and return the
kit to the stowage area.
What To Do After the Tire Has Been Sealed
After using the temporary mobility kit to seal your tire, you will need to
replace the sealant canister and clear tube (hose). Sealing compound
and spare parts can be obtained and replaced at an authorized Ford
Motor Company dealership or tire dealer. Empty sealant bottles may be
disposed of at home. However, liquid residue from the sealing compound
should be disposed by your local Ford Motor Company dealership or tire
dealer, or in accordance with local waste disposal regulations.
Note: After the sealing compound has been used, the maximum vehicle
speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) and the maximum driving distance is
120 miles (200 kilometers). The sealed tire should be inspected
immediately.
Note: After sealant use, the tire pressure monitoring system sensor and
valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
You can check the tire pressure anytime within the 120 miles
(200 kilometers) by performing the procedure from Second Stage:
Checking Tire Pressure listed previously.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
292
Wheels and Tires
Removal of the sealant canister from the temporary mobility kit:
1. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.
2. Locate the yellow cap at the end
of the clear tube.
3. Using the yellow cap tool, press
the tab located on the temporary
mobility kit compressor housing
while pulling up on the sealant
canister.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
293
Installation of the sealant canister to the temporary mobility kit:
1. Align the sealant canister with
the temporary mobility kit housing.
2. Once aligned, seat the sealant
canister by lightly pushing down
until you hear an audible click.
3. Wrap the clear tube around the
compressor housing.
Note: If you experience any difficulties with the removal or installation
of the sealant canister, consult your Ford Motor Company authorized
dealer for assistance.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
294
Wheels and Tires
Be sure to check the sealant
compound’s use-by date regularly.
The use-by date is on the lower
right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister
(bottle). The sealant canister should be replaced after four years.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles
(160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as rotation, flat tire,
wheel removal ).
Lug nut socket
Wheel lug nut torque*
size/Bolt size
ft-lb
N•m
1⁄2 x 20
100
135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
and mounting surface prior to
installation. Remove any visible
corrosion or loose particles.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Capacities and Specifications
295
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Ignition system
Spark plug gap
Compression ratio
3.7L V6 Engine
227
Minimum 87 octane
1-4-2-5-3-6
Coil on plug
0.049–0.053 in
(1.25-1.35 mm)
10.5:1
5.0L V8 Engine
302
Minimum 87 octane
1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2
Coil on plug
0.049–0.053 in
(1.25–1.35 mm)
11.0:1
For Shelby GT500 octane requirements, see the Shelby GT500 Supplement.
DRIVEBELT ROUTING
1. The short drivebelt is on the first pulley groove closest to engine.
2. The long drivebelt is on the second pulley groove farthest from engine.
3.7L V6 engine
5.0L V8 engine
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Item
Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number /
Ford Specification
PM-1C (US), CPM1C
Motorcraft® High
Between MIN and
(Canada)/
Brake fluid and (clutch
Performance DOT 3 or
MAX lines on
WSS-M6C65-A1 or PM-20
fluid-if equipped)
DOT 4 LV Motor Vehicle
reservoir
/
Brake Fluid
WSS-M6C65-A2
XL-6 /
Door weatherstrips
—
Silicone Lubricant
ESR-M13P4-A
Door latch, hood latch,
Motorcraft® XL-5
auxiliary hood latch,
(aerosol) or CRCA®
striker plates, seat
—
Multi-Purpose Grease
SL3151/
tracks and fuel filler
WSS-M1C93-B
door hinge
12.4 quarts
(11.7L)
(3.7L engine)
13.0 quarts
Motorcraft® Orange
•VC-3DIL-B (US)
(12.3L)
Antifreeze/Coolant
•CVC-3DIL-B (Canada) /
Engine coolant3
(5.0L engine)
Prediluted
WSS-M97B44-D2
15.2 quarts
(14.4L)
(5.0L engine with
Track Pack)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
296
Capacities and Specifications
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Automatic transmission
fluid2,4
Rear axle fluid1
Lock cylinders
Engine oil with Track
Pack7
Engine oil without
Track Pack6
Item
Ford part name or
equivalent
•Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Premium
6.0 quarts (5.7L) Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil (US)
(3.7L engine)
•Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Full Synthetic
Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Super Premium
8.0 quarts (7.6L) Motor Oil (Canada)
(5.0L engine)
•Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Synthetic Motor
Oil (Canada)
Motorcraft® Full
8.0 quarts (7.6L)
Synthetic 5W-50 Motor
(5.0L engine)
Oil
Motorcraft® Penetrating
—
and Lock Lubricant
Motorcraft® SAE
4.0 pints (1.9L)
75W-140 Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
11.9 quarts
Motorcraft®
(11.2L)
MERCON® LV ATF
Capacity
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON® LV
XY-75W140-QL /
WSP-M2C192-A
XO-5W50-QGT /
WSS-M2C931-B with API
Certification Mark
XL-1 /
None
•XO-5W20-QSP (US)
•XO-5W20-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C945-A with API
Certification Mark
Ford part number /
Ford Specification
Capacities and Specifications
297
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
2.7 quarts (2.6L)
Fill as required
Manual transmission
fluid
(3.7L engine)5
Manual transmission
fluid
(5.0L engine)5
Windshield washer fluid
XT-11-QDC /
WSS-M2C200-D2
ZC-32-A (US)
CXC-37-(A, B, D and F)
(Canada) /
WSB-M8B16-A2/- -
Motorcraft® Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate (US)
Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid
(Canada)
Ford part number /
Ford Specification
Motorcraft® Dual Clutch
Transmission Fluid
Ford part name or
equivalent
Fuel tank
16.0 gallons
—
—
(60.6L)
1
Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification
EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of Traction-Lok or TORSEN® axles.
Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant that does not require changing unless the
axle has been submerged in water.
When subjecting your car to high-speed or competition use, the axle fluid and friction modifier
should be changed after the initial (first) hour of high-speed operation or if the vehicle is
subjected to track or competition conditions; thereafter changing the axle lubricant and friction
modifier every 12 hours (under these conditions).
Capacity
Item
298
Capacities and Specifications
Capacity
Ford part name or
Ford part number /
equivalent
Ford Specification
2
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV should only use MERCON® LV fluid. See
Scheduled Maintenance Information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
4
Approximate dry capacity, including cooler and tubes. Fluid level should be checked by an
authorized dealer.
5
Service refill capacity is covered under Checking and Adding Manual Transmission Fluid in
this chapter.
6
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C945-A and display the API Certification Mark.
Your engine has been designed to be used with Ford engine oil, which gives a fuel economy
benefit while maintaining the durability of your engine.
Using oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced
engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels.
7
Your engine has been designed to be used with Ford engine oil, which gives a fuel economy
benefit while maintaining the durability of your engine.
Using oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced
engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels.
Item
Capacities and Specifications
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
299
300
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
Air filter element
Battery2
Oil filter
Spark plugs1
Cabin air filter
Windshield wiper
blade
3.7L V6 engine
5.0L V8 engine
FA-1897
FA-1897
BXT-96R-590
BXT-96R-590
FL-500-S
FL-500-S
SP520
SP519
FP53
FP53
WW-2201-PF (driver side)
WW-2001-PF (passenger side)
1
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. See Scheduled
Maintenance Information for the appropriate intervals for changing the
spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft® or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
2
For battery replacement of the Mustang Boss 302, use Motorcraft®
battery BXT-96R-500.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Capacities and Specifications
301
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
A. World manufacturer identifier
B. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
C. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D. Engine type
E. Check digit
F. Model year
G. Assembly plant
H. Production sequence number.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
302
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance Certification
Label be affixed to a vehicle and
prescribe where the Safety
Compliance Certification Label may be
located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, the door
latch post, or the edge of the door
near the door latch, next to the
driver’s seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description
Six-speed manual transmission (MT82)
Six-speed automatic transmission (6R80)
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Code
X
3
Accessories
303
ACCESSORIES
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your
vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online store at:
Accessories.Ford.com (U.S. only).
Ford Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your
local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Ford Custom Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12000 miles (20000 kilometers) (whichever occurs first),
or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
•
•
•
•
•
•
Quarter window louvers
Front end covers
Grille inserts
Hood vents
Graphic stripes
Rear spoilers
•
•
•
•
•
•
Splash guards
Side window deflectors
Wheels
Custom graphics*
Side scoops
Body kits
Interior style
•
•
•
•
Floor mats
• Illuminated gear shift knob*
Sport pedals
•Illuminated door sill plates
Flexible visor storage system (tissue dispenser, organizer, CD holder)
Auto dimming rearview mirror with compass and temperature
Lifestyle
• Ash cup / smoker’s package
• Soft cargo organizers
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
• Cargo net
• Cargo area protectors
304
Accessories
Peace of mind
• Remote start
• Full vehicle covers
• Vehicle security systems
• Keyless entry keypad
• Wheel locks
• Locking fuel plug
• Bumper mounted parking assist system*
*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are warranted by the accessory
manufacturer’s warranty. Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed
and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been
designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements.
Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer’s limited
warranty and/or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the amateur radio antennas in the
area of the driver’s side hood.
• Any non-Ford custom electrical or electronic accessories or
components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or
the owner, may adversely affect battery performance and durability,
and may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan
305
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S. ONLY)
More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the
powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what is not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S.
and Canada. It is the only extended service plan authorized and backed
by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Ford Authorized Parts used with every covered repair.
Rental Car Reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you are
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
306
Ford Extended Service Plan
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal wear:
• Wiper blades
• Brake pads and linings
• Spark plugs
• Shock absorbers
(except California)
• Clutch disc
• Belts and hoses.
Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can
customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle
and budget.
Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.
Protect Yourself from the Rising Cost of Vehicle Repairs with a
Ford Extended Service Plan
To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists at 800–367–3377, and do not
forget to ask about our interest free payment program, allowing you all
the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time.
You’re pre-approved with no credit checks, no hassles!
Or, mail your name, address, city, state and zip code to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068–9933
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan
307
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan (ESP). Ford ESP is the only service contract
backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the
plan you purchase, Ford ESP provides benefits such as:
• rental reimbursement
• coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
• protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford ESP, you receive added peace of mind
protection throughout Canada and the United States, provided by a
network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers. The Lincoln
Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford ESP coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
308
Scheduled Maintenance
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or
trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with the vehicle.
Regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle have been established
based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle
serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your
cost of owning the vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is
performed and that the materials used meet the specifications identified
in the Capacities and Specifications chapter. Failure to perform
scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected
by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft® and Ford-authorized branded
remanufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed Ford
Motor Company’s specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a
nationwide, 12 month/12000 mile (20000 kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty. If you do not use Ford authorized parts, they may not
meet Ford specifications and, depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping.
They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or bodyshops. Please contact
your dealer for details.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
309
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is imperative
that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor® (IOLM)
system which displays a message in the information display at the proper
oil change service interval; this interval may be up to one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers). When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the information display, it’s time for an oil
change; the oil change must be done within two weeks or 500 miles
(800 kilometers) of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing. The Intelligent Oil Life Monitor® must be
reset after each oil change; see the Instrument Cluster chapter.
If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles
(8000 kilometers) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change intervals.
Note: The Shelby® GT500® does not have an IOLM system; see your
Shelby GT500 supplement for oil change service intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple, complex,
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That is why it is important
to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts.
Parts other than Ford, Motorcraft® or Ford-authorized remanufactured
parts that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of
components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. It is the
owner’s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts. Please
consult your Warranty Guide for complete warranty information.
Ford strongly recommends the use of only genuine Ford, Motorcraft® or
Ford-authorized remanufactured replacement parts because they are
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in
the owner manual and in the Ford Workshop Manual. Additional
chemicals or additives not approved by Ford are not recommended as
part of normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
310
Scheduled Maintenance
Oils, fluids and flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating and foreign material contamination should be inspected
immediately by a qualified expert, such as the factory-trained technicians
at your dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the
specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid
that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using
a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
every month or at six month intervals.
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if
necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as
necessary.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
311
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point Inspection
Accessory drive belt(s)
Half-shaft dust boots
Battery performance
Horn operation
Clutch operation (if equipped) Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkage
Exterior lamps and hazard
Tires (including spare) for wear and
warning system operation
proper pressure**
*
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
For oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operation
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, manual transmission, automatic
transmission and window washer.
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire
sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It is your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You will
know what has been checked, what is okay, as well as those things that
may require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle
inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
312
Scheduled Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
313
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® – 3.7L and 5.0L Engines
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® that
determines when the engine oil needs to be changed based on how your
vehicle is used. By using several important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduce
environmental waste at the same time. This means you won’t have to
remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule; the vehicle lets
you know when an oil change is due by displaying OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED in the information display. The following table is intended to
provide examples of vehicle use and its impact on engine oil change
intervals; it is provided as a guideline only. Actual engine oil change
intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity
of use.
Note: The Shelby® GT500® information display is NOT equipped with
this feature. Refer to your Shelby GT500 supplement for oil change
service intervals.
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Miles (km)
Vehicle use and examples
Normal
– Normal commuting with highway driving
7500-10000
– No, or moderate, load or towing
(12000-16000)
– Flat to moderately hilly roads
– No extended idling
Severe
– Moderate to heavy load or towing
5000-7499
– Mountainous or off-road conditions
(8000-11999)
– Extended idling
– Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999
– Maximum load or towing
(4000-7999)
– Extreme hot or cold operation
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
314
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Scheduled Maintenance*
At every oil change
Change engine oil and filter.**
interval as indicated by Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure
the information display tread depth.
Perform multi-point inspection
(recommended).
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level.
Consult dealer for requirements.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system strength and
hoses.
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect half-shaft boots.
Inspect rear axle and U-joints. Lubricate if
equipped with grease fittings.
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between
service intervals.
**
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
315
Additional Maintenance Items1
Every 20000 miles
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped).
(32000 km)
Every 30000 miles
Replace engine air filter.
(48000 km)
At 100000 miles
Change engine coolant.2
(160000 km)
Every 100000 miles
Replace spark plugs.
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).3
Every 150000 miles
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
(240000 km)
Change manual transmission fluid.
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100000 miles (160000 km).
1
Additional maintenance items can be performed within 3000 miles
(4800 kilometers) of the last oil change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers),
then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
316
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
317
318
Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance
319
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS – 3.7L AND 5.0L ENGINES
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions,
you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated. If you
occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions, it is
not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services in the preceding table when specified or within
3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
appearing in the information display.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers); perform the 30000 mile
(48000 kilometers) automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on,
but the odometer reads 30000 miles (48000 kilometers); perform the
engine air filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset
at 25000 miles [40000 kilometers].)
Towing a Trailer or Using a Camper or Car-top Carrier
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
information display and perform services listed in
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart
Inspect frequently, Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
service as required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 60,000 miles Change manual transmission fluid.
(96,000 km)
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
320
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive Idling and Low-speed Driving for Long Distances as
in Heavy Commercial Use (i.e., Delivery, Taxi, Patrol car or
Livery)
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
information display and perform services listed in
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, Replace cabin air filter (if equipped).
service as required Replace engine air filter.
Every 60,000 miles Replace spark plugs.
(96,000 km)
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or
Dusty Roads
Inspect frequently, Replace cabin air filter (if equipped).
service as required Replace engine air filter.
Every 5,000 miles
Inspect the wheels and related components for
(8,000 km)
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or
6 months
Every 50,000 miles Change manual transmission fluid.
(80,000 km)
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Displays chapter.
Exclusive Use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)
Every oil change
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
with regular unleaded fuel.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
321
322
Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance
323
EXCEPTIONS
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear axles and power take-off
(PTO) units with synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks equipped with
Ford-design axles are lubricated for life; do not check or change fluid
unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the assembly has been
submerged in water. During long periods of trailer towing with outside
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open throttle for long
periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), non-synthetic rear axle fluids should
be changed every 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) or three months,
whichever comes first. This interval can be waived if the axle is filled
with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification
WSL-M2C192-A, part number F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent. Add friction
modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles (see Technical specifications in the Capacities
and Specifications chapter for details).
Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle maintenance: Change rear axle fluid
every 100000 miles (160000 km). Rear axle fluid change may be waived
if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number FITZ-19580-B or equivalent.
Add four ounces (118 mL) of additive friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles. The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been
submerged in water.
California fuel filter replacement: If the vehicle is registered in
California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle
East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates
using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil
change interval is 5000 miles (8000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change
service interval is 3000 miles (4800 kilometers).
Engine air filter and cabin air filter replacement: Engine air filter
and cabin air filter life are dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty
conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
324
Scheduled Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
Initial change
After initial change
3.7L and 5.0L Engines*
Six years or 100000 miles (160000 km)
(whichever comes first)
Every three years or 50000 miles (80000 km)
*
Shelby GT500 owners: See the Shelby GT500 supplement.
Engine Coolant Change Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
RO#:
DATE:
P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
SYNC®
325
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows
you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist®, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic,
Directions & Information) (if equipped).
• Use applications, such as Pandora and Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink™
(if applicable).
• Access phonebook contacts and music via voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition system.
• USB device charging (if your device supports this).
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
326
SYNC®
GENERAL INFORMATION
Ensure that you review your device’s user guide before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST
In the United States, call: 1–888–270–1055
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports
online.
• Required to activate the subscription-based SYNC Services and to
personalize your Saved Points and Favorites.
• Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available
for SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted
when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are
broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so
they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
327
• Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions
as it could cause them damage. See your device’s user guide for
further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized
dealer.
For your safety, some SYNC functions are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device’s user guide before using it with
SYNC.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a
profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This
profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread),
and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The
system also records a short development log of approximately
10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system
data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log remain in
the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in
the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you
no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you
perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to
the vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access the system data for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist®, Vehicle Health
Report, and Traffic, Directions and Information.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
328
SYNC®
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in
front of you.
Initiating a Voice Session
Push the voice icon; a tone sounds and Listening appears in the
display. Say any of the following:
Say:
If you want to:
“Phone”
“USB”
Make calls.
Access the device connected to your USB
port.
“Bluetooth Audio”
Stream audio from your phone.
“Line in”
Access the device connected to the auxiliary
input jack.
“Cancel”
Cancel the requested action.
“SYNC”
Return to the main menu.
“Voice settings”
Adjust the level of voice interaction and
feedback.
“Vehicle Health Report” Run a vehicle health report.*
“Services”
Access the SYNC Services portal.*
“Mobile apps”
Access mobile applications.*
“Help”
Hear a list of voice commands available in the
current mode.
*
If equipped, U.S. only.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions
and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings). You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you
learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
329
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Push the voice icon; when prompted, say “Voice settings”, then
any of the following:
When you say:
“Interaction mode standard”
“Interaction mode advanced”
The system:
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance.
Provides less audible interaction and
more tone prompts.
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not
sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your
request. (For example, the system may ask “Phone, is that correct?”) If
turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested
and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
“Confirmation prompts on”
“Confirmation prompts off”
The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level
of several options based on your voice command. When turned on, you
may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification.
For example, “Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say 2 after
the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after the tone to call Jane
Doe at home.” Or, “Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe, Say 2 after the
tone to play Johnny Doe.”
“Phone candidate lists on”
“Phone candidate lists off”
“Media candidate lists on”
“Media candidate lists off”
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
330
SYNC®
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular
phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth
wireless technology support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the
transmission is in position P (vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission) or 1st gear (vehicles equipped with a manual transmission).
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
1. Press the PHONE hard button; when the display indicates no phone
is paired, press the Settings tab, then Add.
2. If Bluetooth is on, SYNC begins the pairing process between your
Bluetooth-enabled phone or device and SYNC. See your phone’s user
guide if necessary.
3. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display.
4. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
5. Depending on your phone’s capability and your market, the system
may prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as
the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect
with first upon vehicle start-up), downloading your phone book, etc.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
331
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the
transmission is in position P (vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission) or 1st gear (vehicles equipped with a manual transmission).
Note: SYNC can store up to 12 previously paired phones.
1. Press the PHONE hard button; select the Settings tab, then Add.
2. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when
the pairing is successful.
3. The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to
set the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC
automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up),
download your phone book, etc.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice button and say any of the following:
“PHONE”
“Call <name>”
“Call <name> at home”
“Call <name> at work” OR “Call <name> in office”
“Call <name> on other”
“Call <name> on mobile OR cell”
“Dial”*
*
If you have said “Dial”, see the “Dial” table below.
“DIAL”
“411” (four-one-one), “911” (nine-one-one), etc.
“700 (seven hundred)” (seven hundred)
“800 (eight hundred)” (eight hundred)
“900 (nine hundred)” (nine hundred)
“#” “/” (pound, slash)
“<number> 0–9”
“Asterisk” (*)
“Clear” (deletes all entered digits)
“Delete” (deletes one digit)
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
332
SYNC®
“DIAL”
“Plus”
“Star”
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press
MENU to go to the PHONE menu.
At any time, you can say the following global commands:
GLOBAL COMMANDS
“Exit”
“Help”
“Phone”
“Services” *
“Vehicle Health Report”*
“Voice settings”
*
If equipped, U.S. only.
Making Calls Using the Touchscreen
Press the PHONE hard button, then choose between three ways to make
a call:
1. Use the keypad on the Phone tab to manually enter a phone number
and press SEND.
2. Select the Phonebook tab (if the desired number is saved in the
downloaded phone book information). Use the directory buttons to
browse to the desired contact, then press DIAL. (This is a
phone-dependent feature.)
3. Select the Call History tab (if the desired number is saved in the
downloaded call history information), then press DIAL. (This is a
phone-dependent feature.)
Making Calls Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say “Phone”.
1. Say “Call <phone book contact name>” or “Dial”, then the desired
number.
2. When the system confirms the number, say “Dial” or “Call” to initiate
the call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say “Delete”; to erase all spoken digits, say
“Clear”.
To end the call, press and hold the phone button.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
333
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the phone button.
• Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active Call
During an active call, you have additional menu features which become
available such as putting a call on hold, joining calls, etc.
To access:
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select from the following options:
When you select:
Send
End
Privacy Mode*
Hold Call*
Join Calls*
Quick Dial
*
You can:
Receive an incoming call, make an outgoing
call or redial.
End or ignore a call.
Switch a call from an active hands-free
environment to your cellular phone for a more
private conversation.
Put an active call on hold.
Press OK when Place Call on Hold? appears.
Join two separate calls.
Save frequently called numbers for quick
access. You can select and save numbers from
the Phonebook or Call History tabs.
This is a phone-dependent feature.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
334
SYNC®
Accessing Features through the Phone Menu
SYNC’s phone menu allows you to redial a number, access your call
history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone
and system settings. You can also access advanced features, such as 911
Assist™, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Apps.
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select from the following:
When you select:
Phone
Phonebook*
Call History**
Text Messaging
Settings
SYNC Apps
You can:
Access basic options such as making calls,
ending calls and joining calls.
Allows you to access your downloaded
phonebook.
SYNC categorizes your contacts alphabetically
in the Quick Sort buttons on the right of the
screen. The buttons are highlighted if there
are contacts stored in that category. Press the
highlighted category to access those listings.
Allows you to access any previously dialed,
received or missed calls while your phone has
been connected to the system.
Allows you to send, download and delete text
messages.
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, factory defaults,
master reset, etc.).
Access the SYNC services portal where you
can request various types of information,
traffic reports and directions.
*
This is a speed-dependent and phone-dependent feature.
This is a phone-dependent feature.
**
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
335
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages.
The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do
not have to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text
messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature and can
only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the display
indicates you have a new message. You have these options:
1. Press View to receive and open the text message.
2. Press Listen to have SYNC read the message to you.
3. Press Reply to send a message back to the sender.
4. Press Dial to call the sender.
5. Press Cancel to exit the screen.
If you select View, you can:
• Listen as SYNC reads the message to you aloud.
• Compose your own message.*
• Reply to the message.*
• Forward the text message to someone in your phone book or to a
phone number.*
*
This is a speed-dependent feature.
Sending Text Messages
Text messaging is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone is
compatible, SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text
messages.
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select the Text Messaging tab, then press Compose.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
336
SYNC®
Send Text Message? enables you to send a new text message based on
a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
1. Press OK to select. If the system detects your phone does not
support this feature, Unsupported appears in the display and SYNC
returns to the main menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through the message options in the following chart.
3. Select the desired text message. Each text message is sent with the
following signature: “This message was sent from my <Ford or
Lincoln>”.
4. Press Recipients, then choose who to send it to using the Phone
Book or Phone Number.
Pre-defined text message options
Be there in 10 minutes
Be there in 20 minutes
Call me
Call you later
Can’t talk right now
Can’t wait to see you
I love you
I need more directions
I’m stuck in traffic
No
Thanks
Too funny
Where R you?
Why?
Yes
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
337
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to
access and adjust features such as your ring tone, text message
notification, modify your phone book and also set up automatic
download.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears, then press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
When you select:
Phone Status
You can:
See the provider, name, signal power, battery
power and roaming status of your connected
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to view the
information. When done, press OK again to
return to the phone status menu.
Select which ring tone sounds during an
Set Ringer
incoming call (one of the system’s or your
phone’s).
1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear
Ringer 1, Ringer 2, Ringer 3 and Phone
Ringer.
2. Press OK to select.
Note: If your phone supports in-band ringing,
your phone’s ringer sounds when Phone
Ringer is chosen.
Message Notification Have the option of hearing an audible tone to
notify you when a text message arrives.
1. Press OK to select and scroll between
Message Notification On or Message
Notification Off.
2. Press OK to select.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
338
When you select:
Modify Phonebook
Auto Download
Return
SYNC®
You can:
Modify the contents of your phone book (i.e.,
add, delete, download). Press OK to select
and scroll between:
Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts
from your phone book. Push the desired
contact(s) on your phone. See your phone’s
user guide on how to push contacts.
Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the
current phone book and call history. When
Delete Phonebook appears, press OK to
confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
Download Phonebook: Press OK to select and
press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
Automatically download your phone book
each time your phone connects to SYNC.
Press OK to select. When Auto Download
On? appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each
time.
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook
every time your phone connects to SYNC.
Your phonebook, call history and text
messages can only be accessed when your
specific phone is connected to SYNC.
Note: Downloading times are phone- and
quantity-dependent.
Note: When auto download is on, any
changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download are deleted.
Exit the current menu.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
339
System Settings
System Settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect, delete and set a
phone as primary as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect, delete, set a phone as primary,
and turn Bluetooth on or off.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select:
Add Bluetooth
Device*
Connect Bluetooth
Device
Set Primary Phone
You can:
See Using SYNC with your phone earlier in
this chapter for pairing instructions.
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
previously paired phones.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen,
then press OK to connect the phone.
Note: Only one device can be connected at a
time. When another phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
Set a previously paired phone as your primary
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to select the
desired phone. Press OK to confirm.
Note: SYNC attempts to connect with the
primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a
phone is selected as primary, it appears first
in the list and is marked with an *.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
340
SYNC®
If you select:
You can:
Set Bluetooth On/Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK.
Note: Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all
Bluetooth devices and deactivates all
Bluetooth features.
Delete a paired phone.
Delete Device
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete all previously paired phones (and all
Delete All Devices
information originally saved with those
phones).
Press OK to select.
Exit the current menu.
Return
*
This is a speed-dependent feature.
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select the Settings tab, then Advanced.
3. Use the arrow buttons to choose between things like Bluetooth
On/Off, 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report, Incoming Call Ringer, etc.
SYNC APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone
must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone’s compatibility, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• SYNC Services (if equipped, U.S. only): Provides access to traffic,
directions and information such as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and
more.
• 911 Assist®: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency.
• Vehicle Health Report (if equipped, U.S. only): Provides a diagnostic
and maintenance report card of your vehicle.
• SYNC AppLink™: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications
such as Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is compatible).
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
341
911 Assist®
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to a
crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911
Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in the
vehicle so it does not becoming a projectile or get damaged in a
collision. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure that you read the 911 Assist
privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user, that setting applies
for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, a voice message plays
and/or a display message/icon comes on when the vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable
safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC
equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing
911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more
information about 911 Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
• For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
342
SYNC®
Setting 911 Assist On
If your vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system, perform the
following:
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until 911 Assist appears in the display.
3. Scroll to select ON, then press OK. Set On appears in the display.
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, perform the following:
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select the Settings tab.
3. Press Advanced. Select 911 Assist, then turn the system on.
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
• SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
• A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and
connected to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S.,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (which
would activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist is triggered, SYNC tries
to contact emergency services. If a connected phone is damaged or loses
connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to connect to, any
available previously paired phone and tries to make the call to 911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the
call. Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC will attempt to
call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and
hold the phone button on your steering wheel.”
If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made, a pre-recorded
message is played for the 911 operator, then the occupant(s) in the
vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
343
name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash.
• The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
• The phone(s) paired and connected to the system was thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators the vehicle location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash
to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored
by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other
system, (i.e., brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to
use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or
subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the
Vehicle Health Report privacy notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
344
SYNC®
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of a diagnostic report card. The vehicle health report contains valuable
information such as:
• Vehicle Diagnostic Information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
• Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer.
You can run a report (after the vehicle has been running a minimum of
60 seconds) by pressing the voice button and saying “Vehicle health
report”, or pressing the phone button.
To run a report using the phone button and your vehicle is not
equipped with a navigation system,
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Vehicle Health appears in the display, then press OK.
3. Select from one of the options listed in the following table.
To run a report using the phone button and your vehicle is equipped
with a navigation system::
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select the Settings tab.
3. Press Advanced, then select Vehicle Health Report.
4. Select from one of the options listed in the following table.
Vehicle Health Report Options
Automatic Reports
Press OK and select on or off. Select On to
have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a
health report at certain mileage intervals.
Note: You must first turn this feature on
before you can select the mileage intervals at
which you would like to be prompted.
Mileage Intervals
Press OK. Scroll to select between 5000, 7500
or 10000 mile intervals and press OK to make
your selection.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
Run Report?
345
Vehicle Health Report Options
Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of
your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the
results to Ford where it is combined with
scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls and other field service actions and
unserviced vehicle inspection items from your
authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect
your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and
diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to
Vehicle Health Report may also collect additional vehicle information. Ford
may use the vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you do not
want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information, do not
run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com - Vehicle Health Report
Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement - for more information.
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See Using SYNC
with your phone for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing
so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in
an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of
errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
346
SYNC®
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request and for continuous improvement, the service may collect and
record call details and voice communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you
do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not activate or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports,
weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
3. Once you are connected to the service, follow the voice prompts to
request the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can
also say “What are my choices?” to receive a complete list of available
services from which to choose.
4. Say “Services” to return to the services main menu or for help, say
“Help”.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Services appears in the display.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the Services menu. The display
indicates the system is connecting.
4. Press OK. SYNC initiates the call to the Services portal.
5. Once connected, follow the voice prompts to request your desired
Service, such as Traffic or Directions. You can also say “What are my
choices?” to receive a complete list of available services from which
to choose.
6. To return to the Services menu, say “Services” or for help, say “Help”.
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
347
current location, just say “Business search” and then “Search near
me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. You may also be prompted to speak with
an operator when the automatic system has difficulty matching your
voice request. The live operator can assist you by searching for
businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is
a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information
on Operator Assist visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your destination. Once your
destination is selected, your current vehicle location is uploaded and
a route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent
back to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call is automatically ended. You then receive audible and visual
driving instructions as you travel toward your destination.
3. While on an active route, you can select or say “Route summary” or
“Route status” to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the
route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and a new route will be
delivered to your vehicle.
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Good-bye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
SYNC Services Quick Tips
You can personalize your Services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or
a news category. To learn more, log onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Push to interrupt
Press the voice button at any time (while you
are connected to SYNC TDI Services) to
interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip
(such as a sports report), wait for the
listening tone, and say your voice command.
Personalizing
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
348
Portable
SYNC®
SYNC Services Quick Tips
Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not
your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You
can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and
Information and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
You can even access your account outside the
vehicle. Just use the number on your phone’s
call history. Traffic and Directions features do
not function properly but information services
and the 411 connect and text message
features are available.
SYNC AppLink™
Note: Your smartphone must be paired and connected to SYNC to access
AppLink.
Note: iPhone® users need to connect the phone to the USB port in
order to start the application. It is recommended to lock your iPhone®
after starting an application.
Note: The AppLink feature is not available if your vehicle is equipped
with the MyFord Touch® or MyLincoln Touch™ system.
Depending on your display type, you can access AppLink from the media
menu, the phone menu, or by using voice commands. Once an app is
running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering wheel controls.
To Access Using the Phone Menu
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the Phone button.
Browse to Mobile Applications and press OK.
Browse to your desired app and press OK.
Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
5. Scroll until “<App name> Menu” is displayed (i.e., Pandora Menu),
then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s features,
such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more information, please
visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
349
To Access Using the Media Menu
1. Press the AUX button to access the SYNC menu.
2. Press the Menu button to access the SYNC Media menu.
3. Browse to Mobile Applications and press OK.
4. Browse to your desired app and press OK.
5. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
6. Scroll until “<App name> Menu” is displayed (i.e., Pandora Menu),
then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s features,
such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more information, please
visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Navigation Screen (If Equipped)
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the SYNC Apps tab.
3. Press Mobile Apps.
4. Select the app to start it.
To Access Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice icon.
2. When prompted, say “Mobile Apps”.
3. Say the name of the application after the tone.
4. The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, such
as “Play Station Quickmix”. Say “Help” to discover available voice
commands.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your digital music player over the
vehicle’s speaker system using the system’s media menu or voice
commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories,
such as artists, albums, etc.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including:
iPod®, Zune™, Plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC
also supports audio formats such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, make sure that
the device is turned on.
To connect using voice commands:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
350
SYNC®
2. Press the voice icon and when prompted, say “User device”.
3. You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice
commands, such as:
• Play All
• Play Artist <name>
• Play Album <name>
• Play Genre <name>
• Play Playlist <name>
• Play Track <name>.
To connect using the system menu:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press the MEDIA hard button.
3. Select the User Device tab, the press Source repeatedly until USB
appears.
4. Press Music Library.
5. Select from the listed features.
Once connected, the system indexes any readable media files. (The time
required to complete this depends on the size of the media content
being indexed.) If Autoplay is on, you can access media files randomly as
they are indexed. If turned off, indexed media is not available until the
indexing process is complete. SYNC is capable of indexing thousands of
average size media and notifies you if the maximum indexing file size is
reached.
What’s Playing?
At any time when a track is playing, you can press the voice
icon and ask the system, “What’s playing?”. The system reads
the metadata tags (if populated) of the playing track to you.
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and, when prompted, say “User Device”
then any of the following:
“User Device”
“Autoplay off”
“Autoplay on”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play album <name>”
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
1,3
SYNC®
351
“User Device”
“Play all”
“Play artist <name>” 1,3
“Play genre <name>” 1,3
“Play next folder” 2
“Play next track”
“Play playlist <name>” 1,3
“Play previous folder” 2
“Play previous track”
“Play track <name>” 1,3
“Repeat off”
“Repeat on”
“Shuffle off”
“Shuffle on”
“Similar music”
“Voice settings”
1
“<name>” is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of
any desired group, artist, etc.
2
Voice commands which are only available in folder mode.
3
Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.
Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information
SYNC® is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including
iPod®, Zune™, Plays from device players, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
You are also able to organize your indexed media from your playing
device by metadata tags. Metadata tags are descriptive software
identifiers embedded in the media files which provide information about
the file.
If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these
metadata tags, SYNC may classify the empty metadata tags as Unknown.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
352
SYNC®
Media Menu Sources and Features
The User Device menu allows you to select your media source and how
to play your music (by artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.).
1. Make sure your USB device is plugged in to your system.
2. Press the MEDIA hard button.
3. Select the User Device tab, then press Source repeatedly to cycle
through USB, BT Audio and Line In:
When you select:
Music Library
Similar Music
Repeat
Shuffle
Settings
Text
You can:
Access SYNC’s many media features, such as:
Play All, Play Artists, Play Albums, Play
Tracks, Play Playlists, and Explore the USB.
Play music similar to what is currently playing
from the USB port. The system uses the
metadata information of each song to compile
a playlist for you.
The system creates a new list of similar songs
and begins playing. The metadata tags must
be populated for this feature to include each
track.
Repeat any song.
Randomly play available media files in the
current playlist.
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (prompts,
languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
View additional information, if available.
Accessing the Media Music Library
This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist, album, genre,
playlist, track, similar music or even to explore what is on your USB device.
1. Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is turned
on.
2. Press the MEDIA hard button.
3. Select the User Device tab, then press Source repeatedly until USB
appears.
4. Select Music Library.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
353
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no
media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll
through and select from:
When you select:
Play All
Artists
Albums
Genres
Playlists
Tracks
Explore USB
You can:
Play all indexed media (tracks) from your
playing device in flat file mode, one at a time in
numerical order.
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected,
the system lists and then plays all artists and
tracks alphabetically. If there are less than
255 indexed artists, they are listed alphabetically
in flat file mode. If there are more, they are
categorized in alphabetical categories.
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are
less than 255 indexed albums, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more,
they are organized into alphabetical categories.
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type.
SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file
mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC
automatically organizes them into alphabetical
categories.
Access your playlists (from formats, such as
ASX, .M3U, .WPL, .MTP.). The system lists your
playlists alphabetically in flat file mode. If there
are more than 255, they are organized into
alphabetical categories.
Search for and play a specific track which has
been indexed. SYNC lists your tracks
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more
than 255, SYNC automatically organizes them
into alphabetical categories.
Explore all supported digital media on your
media device connected to the USB port. You
can only view media content which is compatible
with SYNC; other files saved are not visible.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
354
SYNC®
Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle’s
speakers from your connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
To access:
1. Make sure your paired phone is in streaming mode.
2. Press the MEDIA hard button.
3. Select the User Device tab, then press Source repeatedly until BT
Audio appears.
Line In (Auxiliary Input Jack)
Your system allows you to select and play music from your
portable music player over the vehicle’s speakers.
To
1.
2.
3.
access:
Make sure your paired phone is in streaming mode.
Press the MEDIA hard button.
Select the User Device tab, then press Source repeatedly until Line
In appears.
System Settings
System settings provide access to your Bluetooth devices and
Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth menu allows you to add, connect and delete a device as
well as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults and perform a master reset.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as turn
Bluetooth on and off.
1. Press the MEDIA hard button.
2. Select the User Device tab, then BT Devices.
3. Select from:
When you select:
Connect
Add
You can:
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
Add a device through Discovery and
Discoverable modes.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
When you select:
Delete
Advanced
355
You can:
Delete a paired media device.
Access menu listings (prompts, languages,
defaults, master reset, install application and
system information).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see
the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone’s compatibility, register
your account and set preferences as well as access a customer
representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for
more information.
Phone Issues
Issue
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
Excessive
The audio control Review your phone’s user guide
background noise settings on your
regarding audio adjustments.
during a phone
phone may be
call.
affecting SYNC
performance.
During a call, I
Possible phone
Try turning off the device,
can hear the
malfunction.
resetting the device, removing
other person but
the device’s battery, then trying
they cannot hear
again.
me.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
356
SYNC®
Phone Issues
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
SYNC is not able • This is a
• Go to the website to review
to download my
phone-dependent your phone’s compatibility.
phonebook.
feature, OR
• Try turning off the device,
• Possible phone resetting the device or removing
malfunction.
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
• Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the website.
• Try pushing your phonebook
The system says Limitations on
your phone’s
contacts to SYNC by using the
Phonebook
Downloaded but capability.
Add Contacts feature.
• If the missing contacts are
my phonebook in
stored on your SIM card, try
SYNC is empty or
is missing
moving them to the device
memory.
contacts.
• Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated
with the missing contact.
Issue
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
357
Phone Issues
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
I am having
• This is a
• Go to the website to review
trouble
phone-dependent your phone’s compatibility.
connecting my
feature, OR
• Try turning off the device,
phone to SYNC.
• Possible phone resetting the device or removing
malfunction.
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Try deleting your device from
SYNC, deleting SYNC from your
device and trying again.
• Check the security and auto
accept/prompt always settings
relative to the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone.
• Update your device’s software
firmware.
• Turn off the Auto phonebook
download setting.
Text messaging is • This is a
• Go to the website to review
not working on
phone-dependent your phone’s compatibility.
• Try turning off the device,
SYNC.
feature, OR
• Possible phone resetting the device or removing
malfunction.
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
Issue
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
358
SYNC®
USB/Media Issues
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
I am having
Possible device
• Try turning off the device,
trouble connecting malfunction.
resetting the device or removing
my device.
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Make sure you are using the
manufacturer’s cable.
• Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the device
and the vehicle’s USB port.
• Make sure that the device does
not have an auto-install program
or active security settings.
SYNC does not
This is a device
Make sure you are not leaving the
recognize my
limitation.
device in your vehicle during very
device when I turn
hot or cold temperatures.
on the car.
Bluetooth audio
• This is a
Make sure the device is
does not stream.
phone-dependent connected to SYNC and that you
feature, OR
have pressed play on your device.
• The device is
not connected.
SYNC does not
• Your music files • Make sure that all song details
recognize music
may not contain
are populated.
that is on my
the proper artist, • Some devices require you to
device.
song title, album
change the USB settings from
or genre
mass storage to MTP class.
information, OR
• The file may be
corrupted, OR
• The song may
have copyright
protection which
does not allow it
to play.
Issue
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
359
Vehicle Health Report/Services
(Traffic, Directions and Information) Issues
Issue
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
I received a text
• Your account
• This is a free feature, but you
that the Vehicle
may not be
must first register online to use it.
Health Report is
activated on the
• Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your account.
not activated.
website, OR
• You may have
the wrong VIN
(vehicle
identification
number) listed.
I am unable to
The preferred
When you register your account,
retrieve the report dealer information you must list a preferred dealer. If
on the website, or did not load
one is already listed, try selecting
I receive a system correctly.
another dealer and logging out.
error.
Log back in and change it back to
your preferred dealer and retrieve
the report.
I am unable to
• This could be
• Update your mobile number in
submit a report.
due to your
your account on the website.
phone’s
• Make sure you have full signal
compatibility, OR strength and that your Bluetooth
• Bad signal
volume level has been turned up.
strength, OR
• Try deleting your phone and
• Your phone may performing a clean pairing.
not be activated
on the website.
I heard a
• The phone in
• This is a free feature, but you
commercial when I use is not
must first register online to use it.
tried to use
activated, OR
• Turn off ID blocker on your
Traffic, Directions • Your phone has phone as the system recognizes
and Information.
ID blocker active. you by your phone number.
• Make sure the currently
connected phone is the same one
that is registered on your
SyncMyRide account.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
360
SYNC®
Voice Command Issues
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
SYNC does not
• You may be
• Review the Phone voice
understand what using the wrong
commands and the Media voice
I am saying.
voice commands, commands at the beginning of
their respective sections.
OR
• You may be
• Be aware that SYNC’s
speaking too soon microphone is either in your
or at the wrong
rear view mirror or in the
time.
headliner just above the
windshield.
• You may be
• Review the media voice
SYNC does not
commands at the beginning of
understand the
using the wrong
name of a song or voice commands, the media section.
• Say the song or artist exactly
artist.
OR
• You may not be as listed. If you say, “Play Artist
saying the name Prince”, the system does not
play music by Prince and the
exactly as it is
Revolution or Prince and the
saved, OR
New Power Generation.
• The system
may not be
• Make sure you are saying the
reading the name complete title, such as
the same way you “California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles”.
are saying it.
• If the songs are saved in all
CAPS, you have to spell them.
LOLA requires you to say, “Play
L-O-L-A”.
• Do not use special characters
in the title as the system does
not recognize them.
Issue
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC®
Issue
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the wrong
contact when I
want to make a
call.
361
Voice Command Issues
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
• You may be
• Review the phone voice
commands at the beginning of
using the wrong
voice commands, the phone section.
• Make sure you are saying the
OR
• You may not be contacts exactly as listed. For
saying the name example, if a contact is saved as
Joe Wilson, say “Call Joe
exactly as it is
Wilson”.
saved, OR
• The system works better if
• Contacts in
you list full names, such as “Joe
your phonebook
may be very short Wilson” rather than “Joe”.
• Do not use special characters
and similar, or
they may contain such as 123 or ICE, as the
system does not recognize them.
special
• If contacts are saved in CAPS,
characters, OR
you have to spell them. JAKE
• Your
requires you to say, “Call
phonebook
contacts may be J-A-K-E”.
saved in CAPS.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
362
Navigation System (If Equipped)
NAVIGATION CONTROLS
Type 1
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
The system divides the screen in two sections after it initializes:
• Status bars: This is the top and bottom portion of the screen. It
displays the clock or date and other useful information, depending on
which mode you are in.
• Display area: The touchscreen changes depending on current
system operation. Different buttons display in this area, depending on
which mode you are in.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS satellite radio, may not be available
in your location. Check with your authorized dealer.
A. I (Information): Press this button to access features such as Where
am I?, SIRIUS® Travel Link™, Calendar, System Info and Help.
B. PHONE: Press this button to access the SYNC phone menu.
C. CLIMATE: Press this button to access the climate control menu.
D. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD or DVD from the system.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
363
E. TUNE RPT:
• In radio or satellite radio mode, turn the control to advance in
individual increments up or down the frequency band to the desired
station.
• In MP3 mode, turn the control to advance to the next or previous
folder.
• In navigation mode, press this button to hear the last spoken
navigation guidance prompt.
F. DISP: Press this button to select a display mode: On, Status Bar Only,
and Off.
G. SOUND:
• Press this button to access the sound menu.
• Press while the sound menu is active to access the menu tabs of
Bass/Treble, Balance/Fade, SCV (Speed Compensated Volume), DSP
(Digital Signal Processing) and Visualizer.
H. SEEK:
• In radio and satellite radio mode, press the arrow buttons to find
previous or next available stations or channels within the currently
selected Category or Genre.
• In CD and DVD modes, press the arrow buttons to select the previous
or next track or chapter.
I. MEDIA:
• Press this button to access the media menu.
• Press while the media menu is active to access the available sources
of CD/DVD, Jukebox and User Device.
J. RADIO:
• Press this button to access the radio menu.
• Press while the radio menu is active to access the available sources of
AM, FM1, FM2, SAT1, SAT2, and SAT3.
K. VOL: Press and hold this button to turn the system off and on. Turn
the control to adjust the volume.
Note: If a navigation route is active when the navigation system is off,
the system resumes the route when you turn the system on.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
364
Navigation System (If Equipped)
L. Memory presets:
• Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune to the
station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
• In radio and satellite radio mode, press a button to access your saved
presets or channels.
M. MENU:
• Press this button to access the system menu.
• Press while the system menu is active to access the menu tabs of
Display, Clock, Feedback Settings, System Settings and Valet Mode.
N. MAP:
• Press this button to access the navigation map.
• Press while the map display is active to center the map on the
current vehicle position. Press while the map display and route are
active to see the different map guidance views.
O. DEST:
• Press this button to access the destination entry menu.
• Press while the destination entry menu is active to show additional
destination entry techniques.
P. NAV:
• Press this button to access the navigation menu.
• Press while the navigation menu is active to access the navigation
menu tabs.
Q. CD and DVD slot: Insert a CD or DVD, label side up.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
365
Type 2
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
The system divides the screen in two sections after it initializes:
• Status bars: This is the top and bottom portion of the screen. It
displays the clock or date and other useful information, depending on
which mode you are in.
• Display area: The touchscreen changes depending on current
system operation. Different buttons display in this area, depending on
which mode you are in.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS satellite radio, may not be available
in your location. Check with your authorized dealer.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
366
Navigation System (If Equipped)
A. Memory presets:
• Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune to the
station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
• In radio and satellite radio mode, press a button to access your saved
presets or channels.
B. CD and DVD slot: Insert a CD or DVD, label side up.
C. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD or DVD from the system.
D. TUNE RPT:
• In radio or satellite radio mode, turn the control to advance in
individual increments up or down the frequency band to the desired
station.
• In MP3 mode, turn the control to advance to the next or previous
folder.
• In navigation mode, press this button to hear the last spoken
navigation guidance prompt.
E. MAP:
• Press this button to access the navigation map.
• Press while the map display is active to center the map on the
current vehicle position. Press while the map display and route are
active to see the different map guidance views.
F. DEST:
• Press this button to access the destination entry menu.
• Press while the destination entry menu is active to show additional
destination entry techniques.
G. NAV:
• Press this button to access the navigation menu.
• Press while the navigation menu is active to access the navigation
menu tabs.
H. I (Information): Press this button to access features such as Where
am I?, SIRIUS® Travel Link™, Calendar, System Info and Help.
I. PHONE: Press this button to access the SYNC phone menu.
J. DISP: Press this button to select a display mode: On, Status Bar Only,
and Off.
K. SEEK:
• In radio and satellite radio mode, press the arrow buttons to find
previous or next available stations or channels within the currently
selected Category or Genre.
• In CD and DVD modes, press the arrow buttons to select the previous
or next track or chapter.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
367
L. MENU:
• Press this button to access the system menu.
• Press while the system menu is active to access the menu tabs of
Display, Clock, Feedback Settings, System Settings and Valet Mode.
M. SOUND:
• Press this button to access the sound menu.
• Press while the sound menu is active to access the menu tabs of
Bass/Treble, Balance/Fade, SCV (Speed Compensated Volume), DSP
(Digital Signal Processing) and Visualizer.
N. MEDIA:
• Press this button to access the media menu.
• Press while the media menu is active to access the available sources
of CD/DVD, Jukebox and User Device.
O. RADIO:
• Press this button to access the radio menu.
• Press while the radio menu is active to access the available sources of
AM, FM1, FM2, SAT1, SAT2, and SAT3.
P. VOL: Press and hold this button to turn the system off and on. Turn
the control to adjust the volume.
Note: If a navigation route is active when the navigation system is off,
the system resumes the route when you turn the system on.
DISPLAY MODE
You can choose to turn your screen on or off and if you would like to
view the status bars on the top and bottom of the screen. Press DISP to
see the options.
Display Mode Voice Commands
The following voice commands are available in display mode. If
you are not in display mode, press the voice button on the
steering wheel. When prompted, say “Display mode” and then
any of the following commands.
Display mode voice commands
“Display on”
“Display off”
“Status bar”
“Brighter”
“Dimmer”
“Day”
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
368
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Display mode voice commands
“Night”
“Auto”
“Help”
STATUS BARS
The top status bar shows the
current mode, exterior temperature,
time and display icons if you have
enabled Bluetooth or other options.
The bottom status bar shows the
Home icon and may also show the
current driver and passenger
selected temperatures, fan speed and air flow direction, the current
mode being used, the Artist and Title of the currently playing CD, Artist
and Title for Jukebox and radio.
Note: As climate controls are vehicle-dependent, some vehicles may not
display climate readings in the status bar.
Customizing Your Home Screen
Depending on your vehicle’s option package and software, your screens
may vary in appearance from the screens shown in this section. Your
features may also be limited depending on your market. Check with your
authorized dealer for availability.
Press the house icon to access the home screen. Here you can:
• Save or view pictures.
• View your current audio and climate control settings.
• Display the audio visualizer.
You can split the screen in to two or three different sections, or you can
choose to have one main view.
• The left side displays an uploaded photo or the map screen.
• The right side can also display the uploaded photo. The upper right
panel only displays the current audio settings. The lower right panel
displays your vehicle’s climate settings or the visualizer.
Loading Photos
Note: The system is not compatible with discs written in Packet Write mode.
Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
369
Only the photograph(s), which meets the following conditions, display:
• The file must be 1.5MB or smaller.
• The file extension must be .jpe, .jpg or .jpeg.
• The file path must be 255 characters or fewer.
• Up to 256 files or folders can display in one folder.
• The CD or DVD must be ISO 9660 format. UDF format is not
supported.
To load photos:
1. Touch the left side of the home screen.
2. Touch the Add button. When the disclaimer appears asking to
confirm the supported photo formats, press OK.
3. Insert a CD-ROM that contains your photos.
4. Touch OK. The right side of the screen displays a list of the photos.
5. Select either Add or Add All to save photos to the hard drive.
Editing and Deleting Photos
To edit photos, go to the home screen, then:
1. Touch the current photo on the home screen.
2. Select the Edit button.
3. Adjust the photo by zooming in or out, moving right, left, up or down
and rotating left or right.
Note: Press the Reset button to return to the original image.
To delete a photo, select the Delete button.
To delete all photos:
1. Press the Menu hard button.
2. Select the System Settings tab on the touchscreen.
3. Press the View button for Delete Stored Items.
4. Select Saved photos.
Using the Touch-sensitive Controls on Your System
To turn a feature on and off, just touch the graphic with your finger. To
get the best performance from the touch-sensitive controls:
• Make sure your hands are clean and dry.
• Since the touchscreen operates based on the touch of a finger, you
may have trouble using it if you are wearing gloves.
• Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch-control graphic.
Touching off-center of the graphic may affect operation of a nearby
control.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
370
Navigation System (If Equipped)
• Do not press hard on the controls. They are sensitive to light touch.
• Keep metal and other conductive material away from the surface of
the touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference (for
example, inadvertently turning on a feature other than the one you
meant to turn on).
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses. If dirt or
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth.
Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not use detergent or
any type of solvent to clean the display.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in
front of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones,
prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation
and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is
not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses
to your request.
When using voice commands, words and icons may appear in the lower
left status bar indicating the status of the voice session (such as
Listening, Success, Failed, Paused or Try Again).
How To Use Voice Commands with Your System
Press the voice icon; after the tone, speak your command
clearly.
You can say these commands at any time.
“Audio”
“Navigation”
“CD”
“Radio”
“Climate”
“SYNC”*
“Disc”
“Tutorial”
“Display mode”
“User profile”
“DVD”
“Video CD”
“Jukebox”
“Voice settings”
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
371
You can say these commands at any time.
“Line in”
“Help”
“Mobile apps”*
*
See the SYNC chapter for more information on these features.
To access a list of all available voice commands, press the I hard button.
Select the Help tab on the touchscreen, then the Voice Commands tab
and choose the desired category.
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction,
help and feedback. The system defaults to standard interaction, which
uses candidate lists, and confirmation prompts as these provide the
highest level of guidance and feedback.
Interaction Mode: Novice mode provides detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
Confirmation Prompts: The system uses these short questions to
confirm your voice request. If turned off, the system simply makes a best
guess as to what you requested. The system may still occasionally ask
you to confirm settings.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
372
Navigation System (If Equipped)
SYSTEM MENU FEATURES
Your system offers many menu features, such as allowing you to adjust
the touchscreen brightness, time and language, feedback and system
settings. You can access these options by pressing the MENU hard
button.
If you select:
Display
Clock
You can:
Brightness allows you to adjust screen
brightness by touching + or -.
Contrast allows you to adjust screen contrast
by touching + or -.
Day/Night Mode allows you to select Day
mode, Night mode or have the system
automatically switch for you by selecting Auto
mode.
Daytime Color allows you to select a light or
dark color for daytime screen lighting.
Note: When the headlamps are on under very
bright outdoor light conditions, the system
remains in day mode, even if night is selected.
Display Clock allows you to turn the clock
on or off.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with an
in-dash analog clock, you can set the time on
this screen, but it may not appear in the
status bar for viewing purposes.
Format allows you to switch between 12–
and 24–hour clock display.
Auto Time Zone allows you to have the
system automatically switch the time
whenever you enter a new time zone.
Note: The system does not implement
daylight savings time.
Restore Defaults allows you to restore
system defaults.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
If you select:
Feedback
373
You can:
Touch Screen Button Beep allows you to
select when the system sounds an audible
tone: All Buttons (whenever any system
button is touched), Touch Screen (only when
touchscreen selections are made) or Off (no
audible tones at all).
Voice Volume allows you to change
navigation voice and audible tone volume by
touching + or -.
Satellite Radio Channel Name allows you
to choose to display the satellite radio
channel name.
Voice Recognition Interaction Mode
allows you to choose the level of system
interaction and feedback. Standard is the
default and provides the most interaction and
feedback using prompts. Advanced uses less
feedback and prompts.
Voice Recognition Confirmation allows you
to choose level of voice command
confirmation. Selecting On causes the system
to always ask to confirm a command.
Selecting Off causes the system to ask for
confirmation less frequently.
Voice Recognition User Profile allows you
to switch between user profiles.
Train the system to better recognize your
voice. Two profiles can be created; see Using
voice recognition earlier in this section.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
374
Navigation System (If Equipped)
If you select:
System Settings
Valet Mode
Voice Control
You can:
Language allows you to choose between
English, Spanish and French.
Units allows you to choose between English
and Metric measurements.
Keyboard Layout allows you to choose
between an ABC or QWERTY keyboard.
Delete Stored Items allows you to choose
to delete all of the entries from Address Book,
Previous Destinations, Avoid Areas, Saved
Photos and Voice Recognition Profiles. Touch
View to see what entries have been stored.
Restore Factory Default Settings allows
you to restore factory default settings.
Lock and unlock the system using a four-digit
PIN.
Note: The PIN can be reset by
simultaneously pressing and holding presets 1
and 5 while on the PIN entry screen. After
approximately five seconds, the system
transitions to the valet mode screen indicating
that the PIN is reset. Once you have reset the
PIN, the system then allows you to set a new
PIN.
Set the system to automatically listen for USB
or SYNC voice commands first. This
eliminates the need to say “USB” or “User
Device” before any SYNC media commands.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
375
ENTERTAINMENT
Your system offers many media options. You can access these options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
AM/FM Radio
Press the RADIO hard button.
To change between AM, FM1 and FM2, touch the AM or FM
tab.
When you select:
Show Options
You can:
Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of
all radio stations.
Scan Presets allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all stations stored in the memory
presets.
Autoset Presets allows you to store the
strongest local stations available in the AM
and FM frequency bands.
HD Radio turns HD radio on. This allows you
to receive radio broadcasts digitally (where
available), providing free, crystal-clear sound.
See the HD Radio™ information in the
following section.*
Multicast allows you to choose which HD
radio broadcast you would like to receive.
When HD Radio broadcasts are available, this
button appears if the selected station has
more than one digital broadcast. HD1 signifies
the main programming status and is available
in analog and digital broadcasts. Any
additional multicast stations (HD2 through
HD8) broadcast digitally. You can access these
by pressing Multicast.See the HD Radio™
information in the following section.**
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
376
Navigation System (If Equipped)
When you select:
Show Presets
Set PTY/All
You can:
View the preset stations. Save a station by
pressing and holding one of the memory
preset areas. There is a brief mute while the
radio saves the station. Sound returns when
finished.
Select a category of music you would like to
search for and then choose to either seek or
scan for the stations.**
Note: The system scans the frequency band
three times for the chosen program type. If
the program type is unavailable in your
reception range, the system returns to the
previous station.
*
This feature is only available in the United States.
**
This feature is only available on the FM1 and FM2 radio tabs in the
United States.
Audio and Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the audio system, press the voice button
on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the audio system, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say “Audio”, then any of the commands in the following
chart.
“CD”
“Disc”
“DVD”
“Headphones”
“Headphones off”
“Jukebox”
“AUDIO”
“Line in”
“Off ”
“On”
“Phone”
“Radio”
“Read Message”
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
“Sirius”
“SYNC”
“USB”
“User Device”
“Video CD”
“Help”
Navigation System (If Equipped)
377
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
*
“<530–1710>”
“<87.7–107.9>”
“RADIO”
“FM2”
“FM2 preset <1–6>”
“AM”
“Off ”
“AM <530–1710>”
“On”
“AM preset <1–6>”
“FM <87.7–107.9>”
“FM1”
“FM1 preset <1–6>”
“Preset <1–6>”
“Seek down”
“Seek up”
“Store”*
“Store preset <1–6>”
“Store AM preset
<1–6>”
“Store FM 1 preset
<1–6>”
“Store FM 2 preset
<1–6>”
“Store autoset presets”
“Tune”**
“Help”
If you have said, “Store”, see the following “Store” chart.
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
**
“<530–1710>”
“<87.7–107.9>”
“AM”
“AM <530–1710>”
“TUNE”
“AM preset <1–6>”
“FM <87.7–107.9>”
“FM1”
“FM1 preset <1–6>”
“STORE”
“Preset <1–6>”
“AM preset <1–6>”
“FM 1 preset <#>”
“FM 2 preset <#>”
“Autoset presets”
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
“FM2”
“FM2 preset <1–6>”
“Preset <1–6>”
“Help”
378
Navigation System (If Equipped)
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog
broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For
more information, and a guide to available stations and programming,
please visit www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio
technology, you may notice the following indicators on your screen:
HD) logo blinks when acquiring a digital station and stays solid
when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
Multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify
available digital channels where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and
digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only
available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following
functions:
When you select:
Scan
Seek
You can:
Hear a brief sampling of all available stations.
This feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not scan for
HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo
appear if the station has a digital broadcast.
Hear the next strong radio station.
If the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts, the multicast indicator appears.
Press Seek repeatedly to advance through all
available broadcasts. If you are on the last
multicast channel, press Seek to advance to
the next strong station.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
When you select:
Tune
Set PTY/All
Multicast
To save a multicast
station as a preset
379
You can:
Go up and down the frequency in individual
increments.
If the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts, the multicast indicator appears.
Press Tune repeatedly to advance through all
available broadcasts. If you are on the last
broadcast channel, press to advance to the
next frequency on the band.
Select a category of music you would like to
search for and then choose to either seek or
scan for the stations.
Note: The system scans the frequency band
three times for the chosen program type. If
the program type is unavailable in your
reception range, the system returns to the
previous station.
Allows you to choose which HD radio
broadcast you would like to receive. When HD
Radio broadcasts are available, this button
appears if the selected station has more than
one digital broadcast. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in analog
and digital broadcasts. Any additional
multicast stations (HD2 through HD8)
broadcast digitally. You can access these by
pressing Multicast.
When the channel is active on-screen, press
and hold a memory preset slot until the sound
returns. There is a brief mute while the radio
saves the station. Sound returns when
finished. When recalling a HD2 or HD3
memory preset, there is a mute before the
digital audio plays, as the system must once
again acquire the digital signal.
As with any saved radio station, you cannot
access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
380
Navigation System (If Equipped)
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Reception area
Station blending
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and
you are on the fringe of the reception area,
the station may mute due to weak signal
strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system
switches back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the
possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the
station mutes and stay muted unless it is able
to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station
(aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it
first plays the station in the analog version.
Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD
Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may
hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the
shift from analog to digital sound or digital
back to analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to
report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting
with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each
station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and
data fields are accurate.
Issue
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease
in audio volume.
Potential Station Issues
Cause
Action
This is poor time
No action required.
alignment by the radio This is a broadcast
broadcaster.
issue.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
381
Potential Station Issues
Cause
Action
The radio is shifting
No action required.
between analog and
The reception issue
digital audio.
may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The digital multicast is No action required.
There is an audio
mute delay when
not available until the This is normal
selecting HD2 or HD3, HD Radio broadcast is behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
multicast preset or
decoded. Once
Direct Tune.
decoded, the audio is
available.
Cannot access HD2 or The previously stored No action required.
The station is not
HD3 multicast channel multicast preset or
available in your
direct tune is not
when recalling a
current location.
preset or from a direct available in your
tune.
current reception area.
Text information does Data service issue by Fill out the station
not match currently
the radio broadcaster. issue form at website
playing audio.
listed below.*
There is no text
Data service issue by Fill out the station
information shown for the radio broadcaster issue form at website
currently selected
listed below.*
frequency.
HD2-HD7 stations not Pressing Scan disables No action required.
found when Scan is
HD2-HD7 channel
This is normal
pressed.
search.
behavior.
Issue
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content
sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or
deleted at any time at the station owner’s discretion.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
382
Navigation System (If Equipped)
HD Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“RADIO”
“<87.7 - 107.9> HD <1–8>”
“FM <87.7-107.9> HD <1-8>”
“Tune”*
“Help”
*
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
“TUNE”
“<87.7 - 107.9> HD <1–8>”
“FM <87.7-107.9> HD <1-8>”
“Tune HD <1-8>”
“Help”
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Press the RADIO hard button, then select SAT on the
touchscreen.
When you select:
SAT123
Scan
Scan Presets
You can:
Press this button to access three different
satellite radio modes (SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3).
Press this button to hear a brief sampling of
all satellite radio channels within the current
genre.
Press these buttons to hear a brief sampling
of all channels stored in the memory presets.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
When you select:
Channel Guide
Direct Tune
Set Genre
383
You can:
See a list of channels sorted by genre and
also skip or lock out certain channels. Select
the desired genre and choose a channel by
pressing the channel name button. You can
then choose to Skip or Lock a certain
channel. A skipped channel is not accessible
using the tune knob, scan or seek functions.
(To access the skipped channel, select Direct
Tune and enter the channel number.) You can
only access a locked channel by entering the
Channel Guide and then entering the system’s
PIN.
Enter the desired satellite channel number
using the on-screen keypad.
Press this button o to choose from a list of
genres. Once you choose a genre, and you
press SEEK, it only looks for channels in that
genre.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
384
Navigation System (If Equipped)
When you select:
Memo
Show Presets
You can:
Press this button to save a song title and
artist to the system. When the saved song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the
system alerts you with a pop-up in the lower
status bar. You can either tune to the station
or ignore the pop-up. When you are in the
Memo screen, the following options are
available:
Refresh allows you to refresh the current
artist and title information.
Song Alert allows you to store the song
information displayed in the Title Field. When
the stored song next plays, the system
displays an audio and visual notification.
Artist Alert allows you to store the artist
information currently displayed in the Artist
Field. When that artist next plays, the system
alerts you with a pop-up.
Alert On/Off allows you to select Artists and
Titles that you would like the system to alert
you to when they are playing on other
channels.
Note: SIRIUS® does not support the Alert
feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company
shall not be responsible for Alert feature
variation.
Display presets at the bottom of the screen.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
385
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any
of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice button
and, after the tone, say “Sirius”, then any of the commands in the
following chart.
“SIRIUS”
“<0–233>”
“<Channel name>”
“Preset <#>”
“SAT 1”
“SAT 1 preset <#>”
“SAT 2”
“SAT 2 preset <#>”
“SAT 3”
“SAT 3 preset <#>”
“Seek down ”
“Seek up”
“Sirius off”
“Sirius On”
“Store”*
“Store preset <1–6>”
“Store SAT1 preset <1–6>”
“Store SAT2 preset <1–6>”
“Store SAT3 preset <1–6>”
“Tune”**
“Help”
*
If you have said, “Store”, see the following “Store” chart.
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
**
“STORE”
“Preset <1–6>”
“SAT1 preset <1–6>”
“SAT2 preset <1–6>”
“SAT3 preset <1–6>”
“TUNE”
“<0–233>”
“<Channel name>”
“Preset <#>”
“SAT 1”
“SAT 1 preset <#>”
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
“SAT 2”
“SAT 2 preset <#>”
“SAT 3”
“SAT 3 preset <#>”
“Help”
386
Navigation System (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS
satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale
or lease of your vehicle. See your authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): You need your ESN
to turn on, modify or track your satellite radio account. The ESN is on
the System Information Screen (SR ESN: XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access
your ESN, touch the I button on the navigation screen, and then select
the System Info tab.
Antenna
obstructions
Terrain
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other materials as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
387
Potential reception issues
When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING... to
interference
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
Station overload
Radio Display
Acquiring...
Sat Fault/SIRIUS
System Failure
Troubleshooting tips
Condition
Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
There is an internal
module or system
failure present.
Possible Action
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
If this message does
not clear shortly, or
with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See
your authorized dealer
for service.
Invalid Channel.
The channel is no
Tune to another
longer available.
channel or choose
another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel. Your subscription does Contact SIRIUS at
not include this
1-888-539-7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal.
The signal is lost from The signal is blocked.
the SIRIUS satellite or When you move into
SIRIUS tower to your an open area, the
vehicle antenna.
signal should return.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
388
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Radio Display
Updating.
Troubleshooting tips
Condition
Update of channel
programming in
progress.
Your satellite service is
no longer available.
Possible Action
No action required.
The process may take
up to three minutes.
Call SIRIUS
Contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
1-888-539-7474 to
resolve subscription
issues.
No Channels Available. All the channels in the Use the channel guide
selected channels are to turn off the Lock
either skipped or
or Skip function on
locked.
that station.
Subscription Updated. SIRIUS has updated
No action required.
the channels available
for your vehicle.
CD
Press the MEDIA hard button, and then select the CD tab on
the touchscreen. If there is no disc in the system, NO DISC
appears in the status bar and you cannot access the CD screen.
Once a disc is loaded, you can choose from Scan, Compress, Repeat,
Shuffle, Track List and Record.
When you select:
Scan
Compress
Repeat
Shuffle
Track List
Record
You can:
Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Turn the compression feature on and off. This
feature boosts more quiet music and lowers
louder music to minimize the need for volume
adjustment.
Hear the selected track continuously.
Play the tracks in a random order.
View a list of the tracks.
Save the CD or CD tracks into the Jukebox to
hear them played later.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
389
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“Folder mode”
“Folder mode off”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play folder <1–255>”
“Play folder <1–255>
track <1–512>”
“CD”
“Play next folder”
“Play next track”
“Play previous folder”
“Play previous track”
“Play track <1–512>”
“Repeat”
“Repeat folder”
“Repeat off”
“Repeat track”
“Shuffle”
“Shuffle off”
“Help”
MP3
Press the MEDIA hard button, and then select the CD tab on
the touchscreen. If there is no disc in the system, NO DISC
appears in the status bar and you cannot access the CD screen.
Once a disc is loaded, you can choose from Scan, Compress, Repeat,
Shuffle, Folder Mode and Folder List.
When you select:
Scan
Compress
Repeat
Shuffle
Folder Mode
Folder List
You can:
Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Turn the compression feature on and off. This
feature boosts more quiet music and lowers
louder music to minimize the need for volume
adjustment.
Hear the selected track continuously.
Play the tracks in a random order.
Listen to and seek through songs within the
current folder.
Press this button to access and view folders
on the disc. Select the root folder (if
available), then any other folder on the disc.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
390
Navigation System (If Equipped)
DVD
Note: Your system only plays NTSC formatted discs. The system does
not support PAL format.
Your system allows you to play DVD audio and video discs. Make sure
your vehicle is in position P (vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission) or the parking brake is engaged (vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission). This allows you to be able to view and hear the
DVD. If your vehicle is moving, the video does not play.
When you select:
Title
Menu
Cursor Controls
Settings
Search
You can:
Go to the disc’s main title screen.
Go to the disc’s main menu.
Navigate to the desired menu selections.
Video Display Settings allows you to adjust
the brightness and contrast. You can also
choose to return to the default settings by
pressing Restore Default.
Audio Language allows you to choose which
language you would like the DVD audio track
to play in.
Subtitle Display allows you to turn subtitles
off and on.
Subtitle Language allows you to choose the
subtitle language.
Aspect Ratio allows you to choose wide, full,
normal or cinema display.
Angle Mark Notification allows you to have
more viewing angles from which to select.
Once you have made your selection, press
ENTER to confirm.
Go to a specific title or chapter using the
keypad.
Note: Some of the above settings are disc-dependent and availability and
operation may vary.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
391
During disc play, you can also touch
the screen to access the virtual
remote, which allows you to Move
Controls on the screen, as well as
use the cursor controls, Enter and
Return to navigate and select within
the menus.
Dolby® noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby®
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby® and the double-D symbol are
registered trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Disc Voice Commands
If you are listening to or watching a disc, press the voice button
on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to or watching a disc, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say “Disc”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“Folder mode”
“Folder mode off”
“Menu”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play chapter
<1–999>”
“Play folder <1–255>”
“Play folder <1–255>
track <1–512>”
“Play group <1–9>”
“Disc”
“Play next chapter”
“Play next folder”
“Play next group”
“Play next title”
“Play next track”
“Play previous
chapter”
“Play previous folder”
“Play previous group”
“Play previous title”
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
“Play previous track”
“Play title <1–99>”
“Play track <1–512>”
“Repeat”
“Repeat off”
“Shuffle”
“Shuffle off”
“Title menu”
“Help”
392
Navigation System (If Equipped)
DVD Voice Commands
If you are watching a DVD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not watching a DVD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “DVD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“DVD”
“Menu”
“Menu title”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play chapter <1–999>”
“Play group <1–9>”
“Play next chapter”
“Play next group”
“Play next title”
“Play next track <1–512>”
“Play previous chapter”
“Play previous title”
“Play previous track”
“Play title <1–99>”
“Repeat”
“Repeat off”
Video CD Voice Commands
If you are watching a video CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not watching a video CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Video CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
Video CD voice commands
“Play”
“Pause”
“Play next track”
“Play previous track”
“Play track <1–512>”
“Help”
Jukebox
Your system has a Jukebox feature, which allows you to save desired tracks
or CDs to the hard drive for later access. The hard drive can store up to 10
GB* (164 hours; approximately 2472 tracks) of music. The system contains
a Gracenote® media database that allows for display of song title, album
title, and album cover art. After saving music to the hard drive, you can
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
393
access and play your music by specific tracks, artists, albums or genres.
You can even choose to create and access your own playlists.
*Note: 1 GB equals one billion bytes (1000000000B).
Recording Music to Your Jukebox
To record music to your jukebox:
1. Insert a CD, and then select Record on the touchscreen.
2. Select individual tracks or press Select All to record the entire CD.
Note: The system automatically saves all tracks if you do not select
any.
3. Press the Start Recording button.
The progress shows at the bottom of the screen.
Note: If you are not actively listening to the disc during recording, the
record rate is much quicker (as fast as five minutes).
Accessing the Music in Your Jukebox
Once you have saved music to your jukebox, you can then choose
different ways to play the music.
1. Press the MEDIA hard button on the navigation system.
2. Select the Jukebox tab on the touchscreen. You can then select from
the following options:
When you select:
Scan
Repeat
Shuffle
Music library
You can:
Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Hear the selected track continuously.
Play the tracks in a random order.
Access all of your saved music. You can
choose to view or play the material in the
following ways:
Play All Tracks allows you to play all tracks
saved in the jukebox.
Playlist allows you to play your own playlist.
Play genre allows you to have the system
play only music from a specific genre.
Play artist allows you to have the system
play only music by a specific artist.
Play album allows you to have the system
play only music from a specific album.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
394
Navigation System (If Equipped)
When you select:
Options
You can:
Edit Playlists allows you to edit your
playlists.
Edit Music Library Contents allows you to
make changes to the content in your music
library.
Update Album Information from CD
Database allows you to update the residing
album information from the Gracenote®
database after a recent software update.
Hard Disk Drive Information allows you to
access the system’s hard drive disc
information, such as used space, free space
and total capacity.
CD Database Information allows you to
access the CD database information.
Creating a Playlist
Press the MEDIA hard button, and then select the Jukebox tab on the
touchscreen.
1. Select Options.
2. Select Edit Playlists, then which playlist you would like to create.
3. Select which category you would like to access from your saved
music.
4. Select the desired songs and then press Add. The system shows you
the currently selected songs. You can choose to Edit Name to change
the name of the playlist, Delete Playlist to remove it, Add Tracks to
the playlist or Sort Playlist.
5. After you change the playlist, select Edit Name to rename your
playlist.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
395
Jukebox Voice Commands
If you are listening to music stored in the jukebox, press the
voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say
any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to music stored in the jukebox, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “Jukebox”, then any of the commands in
the following chart.
“Pause”
“Play”
1
“Play album <name>”1
“JUKEBOX”
“Play playlist <name>”
“Play previous track”
“Play track <name>”1
“Play artist <name>”1
“Search album
<name>”3
“Search artist
<name>”3
“Search genre
<name>”3
“Search track
<name>”3
“Shuffle”
“Refine album
<name>”2
“Play genre <name>”
“Refine artist
<name>”2
“Play next track”
“Repeat”
“Shuffle off”
“Play playlist <1–5>”
“Repeat off”
“Help”
1
You can say these commands at any time during listening to the jukebox
and after any of the search and refine commands.
2
You can narrow your search beyond the “Search” command by using
these commands.
3
While listening to the jukebox, press the voice button on the steering
wheel control. When prompted, you may say any of these commands.
User Device
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC®, there is a User Device tab. For
more information, see the SYNC® chapter.
Line In (Auxiliary Input Jack)
Your vehicle is equipped with an audio input jack, which allows you to
plug a portable audio device into your vehicle’s audio system. To turn
this feature on, press the MEDIA hard button on the system.
For more information on the auxiliary input jack, see Auxiliary input
jack in the Audio Systems chapter.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
396
Navigation System (If Equipped)
TOUCHSCREEN CLIMATE CONTROLS
Press the CLIMATE hard button to access your climate control features.
Depending on your vehicle line and option package, your climate screen
may look different from the screen shown here.
Driver temperature
Manual controls
Fan speed
Passenger
temperature
Dual
MAX A/C
Climate Control Features
Touch the arrows to increase or decrease the
temperature.
Select any of the following airflow distribution
modes:
Floor and Defrost distributes air through
the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents,
and provides outside air to reduce window
fogging.
Panel distributes air through the instrument
panel vents.
Panel and Floor distributes air through the
instrument panel vents, demister vents, floor
vents and rear seat floor vents.
Floor distributes air through the demister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
Defrost distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents and demister
vents. Touch to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. Touch again to return to the
previous airflow selection.
Touch + or – to increase or decrease fan
speed.
Touch the arrows to increase or decrease the
temperature.
Touch to turn on the passenger temperature
control.
Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated
air. Touch again for normal A/C operation.
MAX A/C is more economical and efficient
than normal A/C mode.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
397
Climate Control Voice Commands
If you are not viewing the climate control screen, press the
voice button and, after the tone, say “Climate”, then any of the
commands in the following chart.
“A/C off”
“A/C on”
“Automatic”
“CLIMATE”
“Fan speed increase”
“Max A/C off”
“Max A/C on”
“Defrost”
“Off”
“Defrost off”
“On”
“Dual off”
“Rear defrost”
“Fan speed decrease”
“Rear defrost off”
“Recirc”
“Recirc off”
“Temperature
<16.0–32.0>”
“Temperature
<60–90>”
“Temperature
decrease”
“Temperature
increase”
“Help”
INFORMATION
Under the Information menu, you can access features such as Where Am
I? and SIRIUS® Travel Link™, view your calendar, see system
information and get basic system help.
Press the I (Information) hard button to access these features.
Where Am I?
Press the I button and select the Where Am I? tab. The system gives you
your current GPS location (latitude and longitude), the current street
you are on as well as the street in front and behind your vehicle position
along with distance information.
Note: Not all tab selections shown here are available in all markets.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
398
Navigation System (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® Travel Link™
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features.
Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information.
SIRIUS Travel Link can help you locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, access the current weather map, get
accurate ski conditions and scores to current sports games.
Press the I (information) button, then select Sirius Travel Link.
Choose from any of the following services:
When you select:
Traffic On Route
Traffic Nearby
My Places
Weather
Fuel Prices
Movie Listings
Sports Info.
You can:
Identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby
your vehicle’s current location or near any of
your favorite places (if programmed).
View the nearby weather, current weather, or
the 5–day forecast for the chosen area. Select
Weather Map to see storms, radar information,
charts and winds. Select Area to select from a
listing of weather locations. In addition, you can
view ski conditions for a specific area.
View fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation
route.
View nearby movie theaters and their show
times (if available).
View scores and schedules from a variety of
sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams
for easier access. The score automatically
refreshes when a game is in progress.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
399
SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands
Press the voice button and, after the tone, say “Travel Link”,
then any of the commands in the following chart:
“TRAVEL LINK”
“5–day weather forecast”
“NBA schedule”
“Baseball schedule”
“NBA scores”
“Baseball scores”
“NFL schedule”
“College basketball schedule”
“NFL scores”
“College basketball scores”
“NHL schedule”
“College football schedule”
“NHL scores”
“College football scores”
“Sports schedule”*
“Fuel prices”
“Sports scores”**
“Golf leaders”
“Traffic”
“Golf schedule”
“Travel link help”
“Motor sports order”
“Weather”
“Motor sports schedule”
“Weather map”
“Movie listings”
*
If you have said, “Sports schedule”, you may say any of the commands
in the “Sports schedule” chart:
**
If you have said, “Sports scores”, you may say any of the commands in
the “Sports scores” chart:
“SPORTS SCHEDULES”
“Baseball schedule”
“NBA schedule”
“College basketball schedule”
“NFL schedule”
“College football schedule”
“NHL schedule”
“Golf schedule”
“Travel link help”
“Motor sports schedule”
“SPORTS SCORES”
“Baseball scores”
“NBA scores”
“College basketball scores”
“NFL scores”
“College football scores”
“NHL scores”
“Golf leaderboard”
“Travel link help”
“Motor sports results”
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
400
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Calendar
Press the I (information) button, then select Calendar. You can
then select which month you would like to view by using the
arrow buttons or selecting Go to Today.
You can view calendars from one previous year and the next 10 years.
Note: Not all tab selections may be available in all markets. Check with
your authorized dealer for availability.
System Information
Press the I (information) button, then select System
Information.
In this screen, you can view the following options:
• Phone number for your Customer Service Center
• Current system versions installed
• Current SIRIUS® Radio ESN
• SIRIUS® Travel Link™ ESN.
Note: Not all tab selections may be available in all markets. Check with
your authorized dealer for availability.
Help
The Help screen allows you to view basic information about controls and
driving restrictions as well as traffic legend information and basic voice
commands available in various modes.
If you select:
Basic Operation
Driving Restriction
Traffic Legend
Voice Commands
You can:
View hard buttons on your navigation system.
Press the desired icon to view the button
description.
View the system’s driving restriction.
View the color code for the Speed and Flow
of roads on the navigation system. You can
also select Traffic Incidents to help you
differentiate between viewed and unviewed
incidents.
View a brief listing of possible voice
commands in a specific mode.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
401
SOUND
The sound menu allows you to access and adjust settings, such as Bass,
Treble, Fade, Balance, Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) and the
visualizer. Press the SOUND hard button.
When you select:
Bass/Treble
Balance/Fade
SCV
Visualizer
You can:
Increase or decrease levels by pressing + or -.
Adjust the sound between the left and right
speakers and front and rear speakers.
Have the system automatically adjust radio
volume according to vehicle speed to
compensate for road and wind noise. Select a
level of compensation between 1 and 7 by
pressing the corresponding button.
Turn the audio visualizer display on or off.
Note: Turning the visualizer setting to off
does not remove the visualizer on the home
screen. You need to select a different view in
order to remove the visualizer.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Your navigation system allows you to set a destination by using your
touchscreen or voice commands.
The navigation system contains map coverage for the United States,
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, Canada and Mexico.
Disclaimer
A disclaimer appears once per ignition cycle when the DEST button is
pressed. Press Accept to agree to the terms and access navigation
functions. If you do not press Accept, you only have access to
non-navigation functions. The disclaimer has information similar to the
following:
• Always obey local traffic regulations.
• We recommend you program the system only when your vehicle is at
a stop.
• Some functions are unavailable while your vehicle is moving to help
minimize distraction.
• Periodic map updates are available at an additional cost.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
402
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Route Guidance in Incompletely Mapped Areas
There are some rural areas in the map database without fully verified
roads. When the system is in route guidance mode, and the navigation
system encounters these incompletely mapped areas, the system alerts
you by:
• announcing, “Entering an area with incomplete map data; please
follow with caution”
• saying, “with caution” in the first route guidance instruction before
each turn
• highlighting the route on the map in yellow
• highlighting the incomplete mapped streets in yellow on the turn list
• coloring the guidance arrows yellow.
Please drive using extra caution when driving in these areas as the
mapping information may be somewhat inaccurate.
Programming a Destination Using the Touchscreen
1. Press the DEST hard button.
2. Select from the following:
Cancel Route
Emergency
Favorite
Destinations
Quick
Touch this button to cancel the current route.
Touch this button to find hospitals and police
stations close to your vehicle’s location. The
system may display up to 25 locations.
This feature stores your home location and up
to five address book entries. To set an entry,
touch a preset button, and then follow the
screen prompts. The system displays the icon
and name associated with the location.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Find Nearest POI
Previous
Destination
Address Book
403
Quick
Select up to five different points of interest
(POI) favorites that you can search for while
your vehicle is moving. You can change these
categories at any time but the default icons
are:
• Gas Station
• ATM
• Restaurant
• Accommodations
• Parking Garage
When you select a category, the system
displays a list in order of distance from your
vehicle’s location. The Quick POI search range
automatically increases to a 50 mile (80 km)
radius if no point of interest is found within
the default 25 mile (40 km) radius.
You also have the option to select List All
Categories, which displays a list of all
categories.
Touch this button to select one of your
previous destinations.
Touch this button to set an entry in your
address book as your destination.
Standard
Note: Items on this screen are selectable only when your vehicle is
moving at speeds slower than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Address Book
You can store up to 25 entries, which you can
use as destinations, waypoints and areas to
avoid. You can sort the entries alphabetically,
by date or icon.*
Previous
You can store up to 20 recently used
Destination
destinations and waypoints. Duplicate entries
do not appear in the list. Adding a new entry
deletes the oldest one from the list.*
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
404
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Standard
Note: Items on this screen are selectable only when your vehicle is
moving at speeds slower than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Phone Number
Touch this button to search for a destination
using the phone number of a saved point of
interest or address book entry. Use the keypad
on the screen to enter the phone number.
Map
Touch this button to select a point on the map
as a destination or waypoint by using the map
cursor.
Street Address
Touch this button to select a street address on
the map as a destination or waypoint.
• State/Prov lets you use the keyboard to
type or you can select the area to search from
a list. The system bases the search on your
vehicle’s current position or the previous
selection. You can set the Auto Fill feature on
to have the system fill in some information for
you based on readings from your vehicle’s
GPS. Depending on your settings, the system
may automatically fill some of the location
information for you.
• City is the name of the city you can search.
• Street is the name of the street you can
search. You can search for street names, which
include numbers, such as Second Street, if the
name is entered using digits or a spelling of
the number. This is valid for street names
containing numbers 1 (One) through 20
(Twenty) or 1st (First) through 20th
(Twentieth) only.
• Number is the address number you can
search.
• List is where you can view and select from
a list of State, Province, Territories, Cities and
Names. The system provides a list based on
the first letter you type into a field.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
405
Standard
Note: Items on this screen are selectable only when your vehicle is
moving at speeds slower than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Point of Interest
Touch this button to select a point of interest
(POI)
on the map as a destination or waypoint.
There are three ways to search for a point of
interest:
1. Enter a city name in the City field.
2. Enter the point of interest name in the
Name field.
3. Choose a category from the point of interest
listing by selecting Category.
• State/Prov lets you use the keyboard to
type or you can select the area to search from
a list. The system bases the search on your
vehicle’s current position or the previous
selection. You can set the Auto Fill feature on
to have the system fill in some information for
you. Depending on your settings, the system
may automatically fill some of the location
information for you.
• City is the name of the city you can search.
• Category is where you select the desired
point of interest category or subcategory.
• Name is where you select to search for a
point of interest using a full or partial name.
• List is where you can view and select from
a list of State, Province, Territories, Cities and
Names. The system provides a list based on
the first letter you type into a field.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
406
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Standard
Note: Items on this screen are selectable only when your vehicle is
moving at speeds slower than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Freeway
Touch this button to select an entrance and
Entrance/Exit
exit point to a freeway you select. You can sort
the entrance and exit point alphabetically or in
order of distance from your vehicle’s position.
You can then select the point you choose as a
destination or waypoint.
• State/Prov lets you use the keyboard to
type or you can select the area to search from
a list. The system bases the search on your
vehicle’s current position or the previous
selection. You can set the Auto Fill feature on
to have the system fill in some information for
you. Depending on your settings, the system
may automatically fill some of the location
information for you.
• Freeway is the name of the freeway you
can search.
• List is where you can view and select from
a list of State, Province, Territories, Cities and
Names. The system provides a list based on
the first letter you type into a field.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
407
Standard
Note: Items on this screen are selectable only when your vehicle is
moving at speeds slower than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Intersection
Touch this button to select an intersection
point. Enter the name of the first street, then
the first letter of the second street. The
system displays possible intersection matches
based on the first letter of the second street.
Once you choose the intersection, you can sort
the list alphabetically or in order of distance
from your vehicle’s position.
• State/Prov lets you use the keyboard to
type or you can select the area to search from
a list. The system bases the search on your
vehicle’s current position or the previous
selection. You can set the Auto Fill feature on
to have the system fill in some information for
you. Depending on your settings, the system
may automatically fill some of the location
information for you.
• City is the name of the city you can search.
• Street # 1 is the name of the first street
you can search. You can search for street
names, which include numbers, such as
Second Street, if the name is entered using
digits or a spelling of the number. This is valid
for street names containing numbers 1 (One)
through 20 (Twenty) or 1st (First) through
20th (Twentieth) only.
• Street # 2 is the field where you enter the
first letter of the second street to search.
• List is where you can view and select from
a list of State, Province, Territories, Cities and
Names. The system provides a list based on
the first letter you type into a field.
*
To delete all stored Address Book and Previous Destination entries at once:
1. Press the MENU hard button.
2. Select the System Settings tab.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
408
Navigation System (If Equipped)
3. Press the View button for Delete Stored Items.
4. Select Address Book or Previous Destinations.
Cancel Route
Detour
View Route
Edit Route
Preferences
Edit Route
Touch this button to cancel the current route.
Touch this button to avoid an area on the
current route.
Touch this button to view the entire current
route. You can select from the following
options:
• View Destination displays a close-up view
of the destination and surrounding area.
• View Next Waypoint displays a close-up
view of next waypoint and surrounding area.
• View Turn List displays the turn list for the
current destination. You can also select a road
on the turn list to avoid, if you choose.
Once you select a route as the fastest or
shortest route, you can also select from to:
• Avoid Freeways
• Avoid Tollroads
• Avoid Ferries
• Avoid Time Restrictions
• Avoid HOV Lanes
Touch this button to edit traffic preferences.*
Edit Traffic
Preferences
Edit
Touch this button to edit the destination or
Destination/Waypointswaypoints of a defined route.
Edit Turn List
Touch this button to delete or avoid a road in
the current turn list.
*
This feature requires activation of SIRIUS® Travel Link™, which is only
available in the United States.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
409
Programming a Destination Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel.
If you want to:
Enter an address.
Enter an intersection.
Find a point of interest
(POI) by its category.
Find a point of interest
(POI) by its name.
Go to a previous
destination.
Go to your home
location.
Use a nametag from
your address book.
Get help.
Say:
“Destination street address”
“Destination intersection”
“Destination nearest <POI category>” or
“Destination nearest POI”
“Destination POI”
“Destination previous destination”
“Destination home”
“Destination <nametag>”
“Help”
Note: If you set the system language to French or Spanish, you need to
spell out the city and street names. When in Spelling Mode, you may
speak letters or say, “Line #”. The system works even if you have made a
spelling error.
Route Selection Screen
After you program a destination using the Quick or Standard method, a
route selection screen appears. The screen displays three route choices
for you: Fastest, Shortest and Unrestricted.
The navigation system considers Avoid Areas selections when
calculating the Fastest and Shortest route choices. Check the Avoid
Areas selections by pressing the NAV hard button, then Avoid Areas.
• Fastest considers the fastest moving roads possible.
• Shortest considers minimum distance as its priority.
• Unrestricted does not consider any items to avoid, if any are set
through the Route Prefs screen.
Note: If you turn off all the items to avoid in the Route Prefs screen
and the Avoid Areas screen is empty, or you turn the selections off, you
do not have the choice of an unrestricted route.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
410
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Route Selection Screen Icons
Icons, located above the route selection choices, represent features on
the routes.
A. Freeways
A
B
C
B. Toll Roads
C. Ferries
D. High-occupancy Vehicle Lanes
E. Time-restricted Roads
F. Avoid Area Selection
F
E
D
If you select the fastest route, and the freeways icon is illuminated, this
means that the route uses freeways. However, even if you select to Avoid
Freeways in your route, the route presented may include freeways
simply because there is no other way to get to the destination.
Once you select a route, you can either Start Route to begin the route,
or Cancel Route to exit and start over.
To delete all stored Avoid Areas at once:
1. Press the MENU hard button.
2. Select the System Settings tab.
3. Press the View button for Delete Stored Items.
4. Select Avoid Areas.
POI Categories
Your system offers a variety of POI (Point of Interest) categories.
Food/Drink & Dining
Travel & Transportation
Financial
Emergency
Community
Health & Medicine
Main Categories
Automotive
Shopping
Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports
Government
Domestic Services
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
411
Within these main categories, there are subcategories, which contain
more listings:
Subcategories
Restaurant
Auto Dealership
Parking
Public Transit
Home & Garden
Education
Personal Care Services
Setting Your Navigation Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your
route. Press the NAV hard button.
Map Content
Map View
Map Preferences
Street Name displays current street name
during route guidance.
Time to Dest displays the distance to your
destination and the estimated time of arrival.
Speed Limit displays the speed limit of
major roads during route guidance.
Breadcrumbs displays your vehicle’s
previously traveled route with white dots. The
dots display for about the last 140 miles
(225 km) driven.
Point of Interest (POI) Icons displays
point of interest icons on the map.
Full Map displays the map in full screen with
turn icons in the upper right corner.
Arrow/Map divides the screen in two. The
map is on the left and upcoming turn
information on the right.
Turn List/Map divides the screen in two. The
map is on the left and turn list on the right.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
412
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Bird’s Eye View
Turn List Format
Shortest Distance
Fastest Time
Avoid Freeways
Avoid Tollroads
Avoid Ferries
Avoid HOV Lanes
Avoid Time
Restricted Roads
Map Preferences
ON provides an elevated map perspective.
OFF turns the feature off.
Adjust Angle offers six different map angles.
Top-to-Bottom starts the turn instructions
from the top.
Bottom-to-Top starts the turn instructions
from the bottom.
Route Preferences
Have the system display the shortest route
first.
Have the system display the fastest route
first.
Have the system avoid freeways when
calculating a route.
Have the system avoid tollroads when
calculating a route.
Have the system avoid ferries when
calculating a route.
Have the system avoid high-occupancy lanes
when calculating a route. Also known as
carpool lanes or diamond lanes, these are
reserved for carpools, vanpools or buses.
Have the system avoid time-restricted roads
when calculating a route. These roads may
have turn, lane or entrance restrictions based
on local traffic conditions or seasonal
restrictions.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
413
Traffic Preferences*
Traffic Icons to
Touch this button to display a list of map
overlay on Map
icons that you can turn off and on. The list of
icons includes:
• Weather related incidents
• Road work
• Incident
• Accident
• Closed road
Traffic Flow Overlay Touch this button to have the map show
traffic flow coloring on major roads. Roads
display in green (all clear), yellow (reduced
speed) and red (stopped).
Traffic Alert
Touch this button to have the system traffic
Notification
incidents notifications along your programmed
route.
If you select Yes, a traffic incident pop-up
asks you to consider or ignore the traffic
incident. If you select Yes again, this makes
the system recalculate a new route for you.
If you select Ignore, this closes the pop-up
window..
*
This feature requires activation of SIRIUS® Travel Link™, which is only
available in the United States.
Guidance Prompts
Auto-Fill
State/Province
Navigation Preferences
Voice guides you with tones and voice
prompts only.
Tone only guides you with tones only.
OFF turns off any voice or tone prompts.
When this feature is on, the system
automatically fills in the state or province
information based on your vehicle’s GPS
location. If you live in a border area, you may
not want this feature on.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
414
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Navigation Preferences
When this feature is on, the system displays
the average speed on a residential road,
initially set to 25 mph (40 km/h). You can
change the setting for your driving
preferences. This setting helps estimate your
arrival time at a destination based on your
driving preferences.
Avg. Speed: Main
When this feature is on, the system displays
Roads
the average speed on a main road, initially set
to 45 mph (72 km/h). You can change the
setting for specific roads and for your driving
preferences. This setting helps estimate your
arrival time at a destination based on your
driving preferences.
Avg. Speed: Freeways When this feature is on, the system displays
the average speed on a freeway, initially set to
65 mph (105 km/h). You can change the
setting for specific roads and for your driving
preferences. This setting helps estimate your
arrival time at a destination based on your
driving preferences.
Parking POI
When this feature is on, the system displays
Notification
available parking accommodations around a
destination that is part of your route.
Low Fuel POI
When this feature is on, the system displays
Notification
gas station icons when the fuel level is low.
Fuel Price Display
When this feature is on, the system displays
fuel prices at local stations. You can choose to
display prices for Unleaded or Diesel.*
Avg. Speed:
Residential
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Calibrate
Restore Default
Settings
415
Navigation Preferences
Position allows you to adjust the direction of
your vehicle by pressing the arrow buttons on
the screen.
Distance allows you to recalibrate the
distance to the destination while your vehicle
is moving.
Touch the Reset button to return the settings
to factory defaults.
*
This feature requires activation of SIRIUS® Travel Link™, which is only
available in the United States.
Add
Avoid Areas
Add items and areas that you want the
system to avoid when creating a route for
you. The system does its best to avoid these.*
*
There may be some situations where it is impossible to avoid the
selection(s) completely. For example, if a destination or waypoint is
located in the area that is set to avoid, the system cannot avoid it.
Map Mode
Press the MAP hard button to view map mode. When in map mode, an
icon appears on the upper left side of the screen; this is a toggle button
to change the view of the map display.
Roads on the map display in a variety of colors. Building footprints
display areas of major buildings in the 20 largest cities in the U.S. These
areas may be displayed depending on their size and the map zoom level.
Heading Up always shows the direction of forward travel to be
upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up to
2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The system remembers this setting for
larger map scales, but shows the map in North Up only. If the scale
returns below this level, the system restores Heading Up.
North Up always shows the northern direction to be upward on
the screen.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
416
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Map Icons
Vehicle mark shows the current location of your vehicle. It
stays in the center of the map display, except when in scroll
mode.
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map; the fixed icon is in
the center of the screen. The map position closest to the cursor
is in a window on the top center part of the screen.
Address book entry default icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry. This is the default symbol
shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by any
method other than the map. You can select from any of the 22 icons
available. You can use each icon more than once.
Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only save one address from the Address
Book as your Home entry. You cannot change this icon.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons display on the map and can be
turned on or turned off. Up to about 56 subcategories can display
on the map one at a time.
Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route.
S
2
Waypoints indicate the location of a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and
represents the position of the waypoint in the route list.
Destination symbol indicates the ending point of a planned
route.
Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn
on the planned route.
No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with poor GPS access.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
417
Map Scale
0.1 mi
The map display scale has 17 levels, ranging from
0.02 miles (.03 kilometers) to 1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
The system synchronizes the zoom scales for North Up,
Heading Up and 3D Map views.
In Map Mode, you can zoom in or out, changing the display
scale, by touching an arrow button on the left side of the
screen.
In Full Screen Map Mode, touch this button to use the Zoom Direct
buttons. The Zoom Direct buttons represent the most common map
scales. Touch a button to show the map at the desired scale. The scale is
approximate and based on the width of the map scale button. The size of
the scale varies based on the screen size.
Map Scrolling
Single scroll mode allows you to press and release on the map display
to bring the pressed position to the center of the screen. The scroll
mode times out after five minutes of inactivity.
Continuous scroll mode allows you to touch and hold the map to
begin scrolling continuously in one of eight directions closest to the point
that is touched. The scroll continues until you release the map, and
increases in speed after three seconds. This is not possible if your
vehicle is moving. The scroll mode times out after five minutes of
inactivity.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the map display to access the
following options:
When you select:
Set as Dest
Set as Waypoint
Save to Address
Book
You can:
Select a scrolled location on the map as your
destination. You may scroll the map by
pressing your index finger on the map display.
When you reach the desired location, simply
let go and then press Set as Dest.
Set the current location as a waypoint.
Save the current location to the address book.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
418
Navigation System (If Equipped)
When you select:
POI Icons On/Off
View Traffic
View/Edit Route
You can:
Select point of interest icons to display on the
map. You can select up to three icons to
display on the map at the same time.
Adjust the map display to the right scale. This
scale allows the entire route to be visible in
the screen.
Access these features when a route is active:
Cancel route.
Edit route preferences.
Edit destination/waypoints.
View route.
Edit traffic preferences.*
Edit turn list.
*
This feature requires activation of SIRIUS® Travel Link™, which is only
available in the United States.
Navteq is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you
find map data errors, you may report them directly to Navteq by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteq evaluates all reported map errors
and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS (in Mexico, call 01–800–557–5539)
or going to www.navigation.com/ford. You need to specify the make and
model of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available.
Navigation Voice Commands
When in navigation mode, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. After the tone, say “Navigation”, then
any of the following commands:
“NAVIGATION”
“Cancel next waypoint”
“Show destination”
“Cancel route”
“Show heading up”
“Show map”
“Destination”*
“Destination <nametag>”
“Show next waypoint”
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
419
“NAVIGATION”
“Destination <POI category>”
“Show north up”
“Destination home”
“Show route”
“Destination intersection”
“Show turn list”
“Destination nearest <POI
“Voice off”
category>”
“Destination nearest POI”
“Voice on”
“Destination POI”
“Voice volume decrease”
“Destination previous
“Voice volume increase”
destination”
“Destination street address”
“Zoom in”
“Detour”
“Zoom out”
“Play nametags”
“Help”
“Repeat instruction”
*
If you have said the command, “Destination”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Destination chart.
“DESTINATION”
“<nametag>”
“<POI category>”
“Home”
“Intersection”
“Nearest <POI category>”
“Nearest POI”
“POI”
“POI category”
“Previous destination”
“Street address”
“Help”
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
420
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Focus error.
Bad disc.
Track error.
Invalid disc detected.
A pop-up window
displays “Address not
found” or “Address
range does not exist.
Show the midpoint of
the street?”
A pop-up window
displays “Navigation
fault. A system fault
has been detected that
may cause the
navigation to perform
abnormally. Please
contact your
dealership.”
Possible Cause
The system is not able
to play a reproduced
disc.
You inserted the disc
upside down or the
system is unable to
read the information
on the disc.
The system is unable
to reproduce a corrupt
MP3 file.
The disc is either dirty
or contains an
unsupported format.
Action
Contact your
authorized dealer.
The system
automatically ejects
the disc.
The system skips the
corrupted track.
Wipe the disc with a
dry, soft cloth from
the center to the outer
edge of the disc.
The house number
Press NO and enter a
entered does not exist valid number for the
in the map database.
specified street, or
press YES to view the
middle point of the
street.
There is a system
Contact your
hardware or software authorized dealer.
error.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped)
Symptoms
A pop-up window
displays “Error. PINs
did not match. Please
re-enter.”
A pop-up window
displays “Invalid PIN.
Please Re-enter.”
421
Possible Cause
Action
You entered the wrong Press OK and try
PIN to unlock the
entering your PIN
system for valet mode. again. If it does not
work, contact your
authorized dealer.
You entered the wrong Press OK and try
PIN.
entering your PIN
again to lock the
system.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
422
Appendices
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC® End User License Agreement (EULA)
• You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software
licensed by FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation (“MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as
well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic
documentation (“MS SOFTWARE”) are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is licensed,
not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or
may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with
additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY. The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and
“online” or electronic documentation (“FORD SOFTWARE”) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The
FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with
and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by
third party software and service suppliers. The additional software and
services of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed
materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as ⬙SOFTWARE.⬙
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the
following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or
through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Appendices
423
DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS:
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an
inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent
in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers
shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and
Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and
only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple
EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights
under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE,
provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any
upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and
the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is
an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the
SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with
the terms and conditions of this EULA.
• Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
424
Appendices
SOFTWARE’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected
content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content
owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able
to access content that requires the upgrade.
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use
technical information gathered in any manner as part of product
support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to improve their products or to
provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to
provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements,
add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”).
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components
and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Appendices
425
provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without
liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to
you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you
with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the
SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third
party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE
provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only
as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to
drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and
abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they
pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such
as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means,
and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” or ⬙For Recovery Purposes
Only⬙ you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it
in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms
accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and
“applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or
suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
426
Appendices
property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use
of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and
may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content.
All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this
SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic
form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S.
and other governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection
with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their
affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not
provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their
affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the
DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY
LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED
FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY
EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Appendices
427
End user notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains software that is licensed to
Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and
may subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions
Before using your Windows Automotive-based system, read and follow all
instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual
(“User’s Guide”). Not following precautions found in this User’s Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious consequences.
Keep User’s Guide in Vehicle
When kept in the vehicle, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based
system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first
time, all persons have access to the User’s Guide and read its
instructions and safety information carefully.
WARNING: Operating certain parts of this system while driving
can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly
cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while
driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting
these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing
some functions you might be required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
General Operation
Voice Command Control
Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be
accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands
from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen
Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while
you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
428
Appendices
access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has
been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time.
Volume Setting
Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where
you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions
Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is
subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features
Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide
turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make
certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow
instructions and safety information fully.
Distraction Hazard
Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can
seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail
Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving
decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never
replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
Route Safety
Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or
illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy
Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in
roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following the suggested routes.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Appendices
429
Emergency Services
Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route
you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency
services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as
police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation features.
TeleNav Software End User License Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the
TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that
you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these
terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch,
or otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time,
with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com
from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement
and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may
pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that
otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to
comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal
judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav
Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places
you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider
to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c) do not input
destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your
vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful
purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e)
arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will
not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any
safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims
resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the
TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your
failure to comply with the directions above.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
430
Appendices
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide
TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about
yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such
information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense,
to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to
access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon
any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure
purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other
parties.
3.1 License limitations
You agree not to do any of the following: (a) reverse engineer,
decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the
TeleNav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source
code, audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the
prior express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav’s or its suppliers’ trademarks, trade
names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings;
(d) distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that (i)
infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity
or privacy or other rights of any party, (ii) violates any law, statute,
ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations
related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity
or defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of
the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or
anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Appendices
431
Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or
other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always
reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible
for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For
example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav
Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps
or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER
STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES
WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE
AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY
DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF
THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR
ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR
GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
432
Appendices
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating
to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered
by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of
the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award
rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having
jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without
giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To the extent judicial
action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both
TeleNav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your
rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned
upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result
in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav,
in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of
the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may
assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice,
provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav
and you with respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement,
TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav
Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this
Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred by
implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and
its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Appendices
433
8.3 By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav
all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required
disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, “Notices”) electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices
by posting them on TeleNav’s Website or by downloading such Notices to
your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive
Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav
Software.
8.4 TeleNav’s or your failure to require performance of any provision
shall not affect that party’s right to require performance at any time
thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of
the provision itself.
8.5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will
be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining
provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect.
8.6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference
only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be
referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words “include” and
“including,” and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of
limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words
“without limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The TeleNav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to
TeleNav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end
users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your
use of the TeleNav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to
comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which
are applicable to TeleNav’s third party vendor licensors:
NavTeq End User License Agreement
END USER TERMS
The content provided (“Data”) is licensed, not sold. By opening this
package, or installing, copying, or otherwise using the Data, you agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement. If you do not agree to the
terms of this agreement, you are not permitted to install, copy, use,
resell or transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the terms of this
agreement, and have not installed, copied, or used the Data, you must
contact your retailer or NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) within
thirty (30) days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price. To
contact NT, please visit www.navteq.com.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
434
Appendices
The Data is provided for your personal, internal use only and may not be
resold. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms
(this “End User License Agreement”) and conditions which are agreed to
by you, on the one hand, and NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.
The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission
from Canadian authorities, including: 娀 Her Majesty the Queen in Right
of Canada, 娀 Queen’s Printer for Ontario, 娀 Canada Post Corporation,
GeoBase ®.
NT holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service ®
to publish and sell ZIP+4 ® information.
娀 United States Postal Service ® 2009. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service ®. The
following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United
States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain Data from Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use: You agree that your license to use this
Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal,
noncommercial purposes, and not for service bureau, timesharing or
other similar purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree
not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or
distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.
License Limitations on Transfer: Your limited license does not allow
transfer or resale of the Data, except on the condition that you may
transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis
if: (a) you retain no copies of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the
terms of this End User License Agreement; and (c) you transfer the Data
in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the
original media (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all original
packaging, all Manuals and other documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc
sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you
and not as a subset thereof.
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Appendices
435
Additional License Limitations: Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by NT in a separate written agreement, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph, your license is conditioned on
use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement, and you may not (a) use
this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication
with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.
WARNING: This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic
Data, any of which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty: This Data is provided to you “as is”, and you agree to use
it at your own risk. NT and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any
kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness,
reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be
obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted
or error free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion
may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN
RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION
ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT,
WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS
DATA; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
436
Appendices
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE
BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN
IF NT OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and
Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations,
so to that extent the above may not apply to you.
Export Control: You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the
Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with
all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules
and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and
regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security
of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such export
laws, rules or regulations prohibit NT from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire
agreement between NT (and its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements
previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Severability: You and NT agree that if any portion of this agreement is
found illegal or unenforceable, that portion shall be severed and the
remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect.
Governing Law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by
the laws of the State of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree
to submit to the personal jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and
all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the
Data provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users: If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying
rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States
government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at
48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User
License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Appendices
437
furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use”, and be treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER)
NAME:
NAVTEQ
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101
and is subject to the EndUser License Agreement under
which this Data was provided.
娀 2011 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal
official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify
NAVTEQ prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 娀2013 JiWire.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music — related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 娀
2000–2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 娀 2000–2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued
or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the ⬙Powered by Gracenote™⬙ logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”), and to
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
438
Appendices
perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of
the intended End User functions of this device
This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote’s providers. If
so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data
shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote (“Gracenote
Content”), Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music
file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including
all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any information that you
provide, including any copyrighted material or music file information. You
agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or
separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company’s
own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to
allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA
AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU “AS IS.”
NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY
OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND
SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Appendices
439
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES’ RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN
THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY
CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT
THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS
NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR
ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS
ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED
BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY
LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
娀 Gracenote 2007
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
440
Index
911 Assist™ ..............................341
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................173
Accessing call history/phone
book during active call .............333
Accessing the help screen .......400
Accessing the music in your
jukebox ......................................393
Accessing your media menu
features ......................................352
Accessing your phone menu
features ......................................334
Accessory delay ..........................85
Active call menu options .........333
Advanced menu options ...........340
Advanced menu options
(prompts, languages, defaults,
master reset, installing
applications) ..............................340
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................45
and child safety seats ..............46
description ................................45
disposal ......................................53
driver airbag ..............................45
passenger airbag .......................45
side airbag ...........................45, 50
Air cleaner filter .......244–245, 300
Air conditioning ........................128
manual heating and air
conditioning system ...............128
Air filter, cabin ..........................134
AM/FM .......................................375
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................235
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................173
Anti-theft system ..................69, 71
arming the system ..............69, 72
disarming a triggered system ..73
AppLink™ .................................348
Audio system
CD-MP3 ...................................119
Audio system (see Radio) .......119
Automatic transmission ............163
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................164
fluid, adding ............................239
fluid, checking ........................239
fluid, refill capacities ..............296
fluid, specification ..................296
Selectshift (SST) ....................164
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ..122
Auxiliary powerpoint ................148
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........296
refill capacities ........................296
traction lok ..............................170
B
Battery .......................................241
acid, treating emergencies .....241
jumping a disabled battery ....211
maintenance-free ....................241
replacement, specifications ...300
servicing ..................................241
Booster seats ...............................22
Brakes ........................................173
anti-lock ...................................173
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................173
brake warning light ................173
fluid, checking and adding ....240
Index
fluid, refill capacities ..............296
fluid, specifications .................296
lubricant specifications ..........296
parking ....................................174
shift interlock ..........................165
trailer .......................................196
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....296
CD ..............................................119
CD player ..................................117
CD voice commands ................389,
391–392
Cell phone use ............................16
Changing a tire .........................281
Child safety restraints ..........27, 29
Child safety seats
attaching with tether straps ....29
automatic locking mode
(retractor) .................................36
LATCH .......................................27
Child safety seats booster seats ...............................22
Cleaning the touchscreen ........370
Cleaning your vehicle ...............252
engine compartment ..............254
instrument panel ....................256
interior .....................................255
interior trim ............................351
plastic parts ............................253
washing ....................................252
waxing .....................................254
wheels ......................................257
wiper blades ............................255
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ..........128
Clock ..........................................119
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
441
Clutch
fluid ..........................................240
operation while driving ..........167
recommended shift speeds ....168
Compass, electronic ..................115
calibration ...............................116
set zone adjustment ...............116
Connecting a digital media
player to SYNC® ......................349
Console ......................................149
Convertible
cleaning ...................................253
closing the top ........................204
installation of the boot ...........202
opening the top ......................200
Coolant ......................................235
checking and adding ..............235
refill capacities ........................296
specifications ..........................296
Creating a playlist .....................394
Customer Assistance ................209
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..................................305, 307
Getting roadside assistance ...209
Getting the service you
need .........................................214
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................220
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................218
Customizing your home
screen ........................................368
D
Defrost ...............................128, 130
rear window ............................133
442
Index
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................239
engine oil .................................234
Driving under special
conditions ..................................166
through water .........................206
Dual automatic temperature
control (DATC) .........................130
E
Electronic message center .........97
Electronic stability control ......177
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................211
running out of fuel .................156
Emission control system ..........160
End user license agreement ....422
Engine ........................................295
cleaning ...................................254
coolant .....................................235
fail-safe cooling .......................238
idle speed control ...................241
lubrication specifications .......296
refill capacities ........................296
service points ..................232–233
Engine block heater .................152
Engine oil
checking and adding ..............234
dipstick ....................................234
filter, specifications ................300
refill capacities ........................296
specifications ..........................296
Event data recording ..................12
Exhaust fumes ..........................152
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
F
Fail safe cooling ........................238
Fleet MyKey programming ........57
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....154
Floor mats .................................207
Fluid capacities .........................296
Fuel
calculating fuel economy .........98
cap ...........................................158
capacity ...................................296
choosing the right fuel ...........155
filler funnel .............................156
filling your vehicle with fuel ..158
filter, specifications ........240, 300
fuel pump shut-off ..................210
octane rating ...................155, 295
quality ......................................155
running out of fuel .................156
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................154
Fuel and distance computer ....107
outside temperature
indicator ..................................107
to empty indicator ..................107
trip distance ............................107
trip/reset button .....................107
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .........................................154
Fuses ..................................222–223
G
Garage door opener ..................143
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............158
Gauges ...........................90–91, 108
odometer .................................107
trip odometer ..........................107
Index
443
H
K
Hazard flashers .........................210
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................65
Keys .......................................55, 70
positions of the ignition .........151
HD Radio™ ...............................378
Headlamps
aiming ......................................245
bulb specifications ..................251
flash to pass ..............................78
high beam .................................78
Head restraints .........................136
Heating ..............................128, 130
Hill start assist ..........................170
Homelink wireless control
system ........................................143
Hood ..........................................231
I
Ignition ...............................151, 295
Illuminated visor mirror .......87–88
Information displays ...................97
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................162
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................256
cluster ........................................92
J
Jack ............................................281
positioning ...............................281
storage .....................................281
Joining two calls
(multiparty/conference call) ....333
Jukebox features .......................392
Jump-starting your vehicle ......211
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
L
Lamps
bulb replacement
specifications chart ................251
headlamps, flash to pass ..........78
interior lamps ...........................82
LATCH anchors ...........................27
Lights, warning and indicator ....92
Limited slip axle
(see Traction Loc) ....................170
Loading pictures .......................368
Load limits .................................187
Locks
autolock .....................................65
doors ..........................................64
Lubricant specifications ...........296
Lug nuts ....................................294
M
Manual transmission .................167
fluid capacities ........................296
lubricant specifications ..........296
reverse .....................................169
Map icons ..................................416
Map mode ..................................415
Map updates ..............................418
Media Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................354
444
Index
Message center ...........................97
display color ............................102
english/metric button .............102
MyColor display ......................102
system check button ..............102
warning messages ...........102, 111
Mirrors ...................................85, 87
side view mirrors (power) .......85
Motorcraft® parts .............252, 300
MyKey ..........................................57
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................223
Power door locks ........................64
Power mirrors .............................85
Powerpoint ................................148
Power steering ..........................185
N
Power Windows ...........................83
Privacy information ..................327
Putting a call on/off hold .........333
Navigation features ...................401
Q
O
Quick touch buttons .................417
Octane rating ............................155
R
P
Radio ..........................................119
CD-MP3 ...................................119
Radio reception .........................117
Radio voice commands .....376, 382
Rear view camera display ........180
Rear window defroster .....128, 130
Receiving a text message .........335
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ........................................24
Relays ................................222–223
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ......................66
locking/unlocking doors ...........64
opening the trunk .....................65
replacing the batteries .............56
Reverse sensing system ...........180
Roadside assistance ..................209
Pairing other phones ................331
Pairing your phone for the
first time ....................................330
Parental MyKey programming ...57
Parking brake ............................174
Parts
(see Motorcraft® parts) ..........300
Phone Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................339
Phone redial ..............................334
Playing music (by artist,
album, genre, playlist, tracks,
similar) ......................................352
POI categories ...........................410
Point of Interest (POI) .............410
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Index
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............41
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............35
Safety defects, reporting ..........221
Safety information ....................326
Safety restraints ....................35–36
Belt-Minder® ............................38
extension assembly ..................38
for adults .............................35–36
for children .........................19, 24
safety belt maintenance ...........41
seat belt maintenance ..............41
warning light and chime ..........38
Safety restraints LATCH anchors ...........................27
Safety seats for children ......19, 24
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................302
Satellite Radio ...................119, 386
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............313
SD card ......................................401
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............35
Seats ..........................................141
child safety seats ................19, 24
front seats .......................138–139
heated ......................................140
second row seats ....................141
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................69
Selecting your media source
(USB, Line in, BT audio) .........352
Setting a destination ................401
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
445
Setting the clock .......................119
SIRIUS® satellite
radio ...........................119, 382, 401
SIRIUS satellite radio voice
commands .................................385
SIRIUS Travel Link ...................398
SOS Post Crash Alert .................44
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................295, 300
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................296
Stability system .........................177
Starting your vehicle ................151
jump starting ..........................211
Status bars ................................368
Steering wheel ............................74
controls ......................................74
tilting .........................................74
Sunshade .....................................89
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) (see airbags) ....................45
Supported media file types ......351
SYNC® AppLink™ ...................348
SYNC® customer support ........326
SYNC® Services ........................345
System overview ...............362, 365
T
Temperature control
(see Climate control) .......128, 130
Temporary mobility kit .............286
Text messaging .........................335
Text messaging (sending,
downloading, deleting) .....335, 337
446
Index
Tilt steering wheel ......................74
Tires ...........................261–262, 281
alignment ................................275
care ..........................................261
changing ..........................281, 283
checking the pressure ............271
inflating ...................................269
label .........................................268
replacing ..................................273
rotating ....................................275
safety practices .......................274
sidewall information ...............264
snow tires and chains ............276
spare tire .................................281
Temporary mobility kit ..........286
terminology .............................262
tire grades ...............................262
treadwear ........................261, 271
Touchscreen features
(climate) ....................................396
Towing .......................194, 198–199
recreational towing .................199
trailer towing ..........................194
wrecker ....................................198
Traction control ........................175
Traction-lok rear axle ...............170
Traffic, Directions and
Information ................................345
Transmission
automatic operation ...............163
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....165
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................239
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .................................240
fluid, refill capacities ..............296
lubricant specifications ..........296
Troubleshooting ........................420
Trunk ...........................................68
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
remote release ....................65, 67
Turn signal ..................................82
U
USB port ............................124, 349
Using privacy mode ..................333
V
Vehicle health report ................343
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................301
Vehicle loading ..........................187
Ventilating your vehicle ...........152
Visor storage system ..................88
Voice commands in media
mode ..........................................350
Voice commands in phone
mode ..........................................331
Voice recognition ......................370
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......92
Washer fluid ..............................241
Water, Driving through .............206
Where am I? ..............................397
Windows
power .........................................83
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................77
checking and adding fluid .....241
replacing wiper blades ...........243
Wrecker towing .........................198
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising